Home

956 DRAFT VERSION all

1. enne 7 8 Displays during the execution of the AUTO SAVE switching on the FILE NAME skipping and return to the SAVE OPTION sub ST a niai ebore een edm 7 9 Display after attempt of switching on AUTO SAVE option with too short INT PERIOD 222222 22 2 1 7 9 Displays during the execution of the AUTO SAVE switching on the FILE NAME confirmation and return to the FILE St e 7 9 Displays after the incorrect file name edition nn eren eene ener tnnt nennen 7 9 Measurement results presented after pressing the lt A gt or Y push buttons asss 7 10 Results saved from a profile presented after pressing the amp or lt gt gt and ALT push buttons 7 10 Results saved from a profile presented after pressing the lt lt gt or lt gt gt and ALT push buttons 7 10 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the DIRECT 5 000022 2 0 000 eene eene ether enn 7 11 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 11 Exemplary executions of the software with the DIRECT SAVE not active essen 7 11 Exemplary executions of the software with the DIRECT SAVE 7 11 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the SAVE MAX SPECT
2. EREA 7 20 Execution of the SET3 file deletion and its influence on the memory 7 21 Execution of the SETS file deletion and the influence of this process on the memory space 7 21 DELETE ALL text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE lIst a 7 21 RESULT FILES selected to the execution of the DELETE ALL 7 21 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 22 Displays with the confirmation window during the execution of the DELETE ALL operation 7 22 Execution of the DELETE ALL operation in the case of RESULT FILES selection eee 7 22 LOGGER FILES selected to the execution of the DELETE ALL 7 22 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 23 Displays with the confirmation window during the execution of the DELETE ALL operation 7 23 Execution of the DELETE ALL operation in the case of LOGGER FILES selected esses 7 23 SETUP FILES selected to the execution of the DELETE ALL operation enne 7 23 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable opera
3. RECORDER TRIGGER windows with the GRADIENT selection 10 dB step up 5 5 Selection of FFT analysis parameters FFT The FFT is accessible in the INPUT list when the FFT function is selected in MEASUREMENT FUNCTION window path MENU FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION FFT This sub list is opened after the selection of the FFT text from the INPUT list by means of the lt A gt v lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER The FFT consists of the parameters which influence the calculation and logging the results of the FFT analysis AVERAGING FILTER BAND WINDOW LINES and LOGGER The FFT window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt 5 gt push button INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LINEAR MEASUREMENT RANGE gt ENTER gt Z PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 5 20 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL FFT selected in the INPUT list and the FFT window opened 5 5 1 The averaging of spectra in the FFT analysis AVERAGING The AVERAGING influences the way in which the spectra in the FFT analysis are averaged Up to the internal software version named as 6 04 only LINEAR is available this position can not be accessed and changed 5 5 2 Weighting filter during the FFT analysis FILTER During the FFT analysis only Z filter type 1 according to the IEC 61672 1 standard is available 5 5 3 Selecting the analysis band of the signal BAND
4. sese 7 12 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the SAVE MIN SPECT seen 7 12 FILE list with the LOAD text highlighted displayed 7 12 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 13 Display during the execution of the LOAD operation eren eene eene ener tenerent tren 7 13 Exemplary contents of the LOAD WIndOW luan Sauna nennen ener tenerent 7 13 Exemplary result files associated with the same logger file 2 2 7 14 Display during the execution of the loading function esses enin nennen enne enne nene enne nennt 7 14 Displays after the execution of the LOAD operation nennen eren en eene nenne nennen tren 7 14 Exemplary displays during the loading and checking the contents of a 1 1 OCTAVE 7 14 FILE list with the DELETE text highlighted displayed 7 15 RESULT FILES selected to be deleted and the flash memory does not contain any 1 7 15 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 15 Selection of the RESULT FILES to be deleted esee neret ener terns 7 16 Execution of the
5. or RMS in the case of VM but the instrument still waits for the logger results i e the LOGGER STEP is long the NO RESULTS text is displayed When the LOGGER is selected as active and the LOGGER positions in all profiles are not selected the LOGGER mode of results presentation is skipped a H RESULTS Display in the LOGGER mode when there is nothing in the logger to be displayed after setting LOGGER as active The display with the measurement result in so called one profile mode is presented below On the top of the display under the icons line there are the following data the function name RMS VDV OVL PEAK in the case of vibration measurements the detector time constant in VM when the detector is exponential 100 ms 125 ms 10 0 s or Lin for RMS result when the detector is linear A Notice the case of LINEAR RMSINTEGRATION path MENU SETUP RMS INTEGRATION LINEAR for RMS result on the display appears Lin instead of detector time constanst A Notice There is not any indication of the detector in the case of PEAK and OVL results The name of the implemented filter path MENU INPUT PROFILE x FILTER is presented as the last element of the first line HP1 HP3 10 Vel1 Vel3 Vel10 VelMF Dil1 Dil3 Dil10 KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb in VM 6 2 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The result of the measurement together with its unit dB or m s
6. 15 PRDFILE 1 ____ 1 ___ FILTER HPI FILTER HPI FILTER HPI DETECTOR RECESS CE TEC TO E DETECTOR EEN LOGGER PEAK LOGGER LOGGER C 1 LOGGER P P LOGGER LOGGER LOGGER MAX LOGGER MAX LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS 1 LOGGER RMS 1 LOGGER RMS 1 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the RMS detector 5 3 3 PEAK result selection for saving in a logger s file LOGGER PEAK Up to four measurement results from each profile can be saved in the logger s file of the instrument In order to save the PEAK result cf the definition in App D the user has to activate this line by means of the lt A gt v push buttons and place a special character in the brackets using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button any changes made in the window confirmed and it is closed The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made in the window is made after pressing the lt 5 gt push button PROFILE 4 gt PROFILE lt 4 gt PROFILE 2 gt PROFILE lt 2 gt HPI HPS HPS DETECTOR 1 85 DETECTOR 1 85 DETECTOR 1 85 LOGGER PEAK LOGGER PEAK LOGGER PEAK a a PROFILE 3 gt PROFILE 3 gt DETECTOR 1 65 DETECTOR 1 65 LOGGER FEAF LOGGER FEAF PROFILE x windows the PEAK result to be not saved or saved in a logger s fi
7. sse 6 17 Displays with the selected logger s file the change of the 1 6 17 Displays with the selected logger s file the change of the result from a profile sse 6 17 DISPLAY list the SCREEN SETUP text highlighted sees nennen nene 6 17 SCREEN SETUP windows the change of the contrast eren eene ener 6 18 SCREEN SETUP windows the BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT active and not active b 6 18 DISPLAY list the BATTERY text highlighted ninine eene sup Qi nen 6 18 BATTERY windows for different sources powering the instrument 6 19 DISPLAY list the UNIT LABEL text highlighted essere 6 19 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL UNIT LABEL windows opened and after scrolling with the A Y push buttons 6 19 Main list the FILE text highlighted displayed inversely essen ener 7 2 FILE list of the instrument teneo eret u tee ET e xi ee iet aetas 7 3 SAVE wandowmn the EIEE 86 t erre OPTED irit pes 7 3 Display during the process of setting the character in the edited name 7 3 Display during the selection of the character s position to be edited a 7 4 Display during the selection of the character 7 4 FILE NA
8. LOGGER P P LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS D LOGGER L GGER P P PROFILE x windows the P P result to be not saved or saved in a logger s file 5 3 6 RMS result selection for saving in a logger s file LOGGER RMS In order to save the RMS result cf the definition in App D the user has to activate this line by means of the A v push buttons and place a special character in the brackets using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button any changes made in the window are confirmed and it is closed The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made in the window is made after pressing the lt 5 gt push button PROFILE i gt PROFILE i gt PROFILE 3 PROFILE 3 FILTER Wm ETECTOR 1 D LOGGER PEAK L LOGGER LOGGER MAK LOGGER RMS LOGGER RMS LOGGER RMS LOGGER RMS PROFILE x windows RMS result to be not saved or saved in logger s file 5 4 Triggering mode and parameters selection TRIGGER SETUP The TRIGGER SETUP sub list enables the user to set the triggering parameters It is not present for the DOSE METER function This sub list is opened after the selection of the TRIGGER SETUP text from the INPUT list by means of the v lt gt gt or v lt gt gt with lt 5 gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER one The TRIGGER SETUP consists of the MEASURE TRIGGER LO
9. Bottom cover of the SVAN 956 instrument in 1 1 scale The USB Device 1 1 interface is the serial interface working with 12 MHz clock Thanks to its speed it is widely used in all PC In the instrument the standard 4 pins socket is used described in details in Appendix C The USB Host interface can be used to connect the external USB Memory Stick or USB hard disk enabling the device to register virtually infinite sequence of measurement results The additional multi purpose input output socket called I O is a two pins LEMO socket On this socket in the case when the Analogue Output functionality is selected the signal from the input of the analogue digital converter before the correction is available This signal can be registered using magnetic recorder or observed on the oscilloscope The Digital Input as another functionality serves as the external trigger while the Digital Output is used to generate the trigger pulse or alarm pulse from the instrument To the Ext Pow socket located on the bottom cover of the instrument dedicated for the connector type 5 5 2 1 mm the user can connect the external power 110V 220V mains adapter The instrument can be charged from the external DC source from 6 V to 15 V The current consumption depends on the voltage of the power supplier A Notice Switch the power off before connecting the instrument to any other device e g a printer or a Personal Computer 2 6 SVAN
10. FILE LOAD SETUP 9710 DELETE RLL FILE H FILE HAME SET2 SETZ SETZ lt KEY DEFRAGMENTATION SETUP Loading Loaded CATALOGUE DATE a HOU 2886 FREE SPACE TIME 21 84 48 SAVE SETUP PRESS ANY Displays after the execution of the LOAD SETUP operation 7 11 Connecting the external USB memory stick DIRECTORY The DIRECTORY text appears in the FILE list when the USB memory stick is connected to the device It is necessary to select in the USB HOST PORT window the USB DISK position path MENU SETUP USB HOST PORT USB DISK In order to enter the window the user has to select the DIRECTORY text in the FILE list using the A v lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button FILE DEFRAGMENTAT IUH n ao DIRECTORY FREE SPACE 62977 KB DIR HO l z DIR 91 Edit directory name b S5H Delete 5H z Insert LOAG SETUP a FILE list with the DIRECTORY text selected a and the DIRECTORY window opened b The FREE SPACE denotes the available free memory on the connected disk The DIR NO shows the number of the selected directory the 1 number and the number of the existing directories the 27 number In the case the directories do not exist these numbers are equal to zero The DIR NAME enables one to edit the directory name the 1 number o
11. SAVE SETUP FILE _ _ SAVE SAVE SETUP FILE MET SAVE SAVE SETUP FILE HAE MET SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIF SH Delete SH Insert 1 SH Insert Press ENTER to SAVE Fress ESC to SKIF S5H Delete SH Insert SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE FILE FILE SAVE SAVE SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Fress ESC to SKIF Fress ESC to SKIF Fress ESC to SKIF S5H Delete SH Insert SH Delete 5H z Inzert 5Hz Delete Insert Display during the selection of the character SAVE SETUP FILE SAVE oa SAVE SETUP FILE HAME LEM SAVE SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE HRME LEM E ME FILE HRME LEM SAVE SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP SHirDelete SH Insert Delete Insert Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP SH Delete SH Insert 5 lt 1 SH Insert Displays in the FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons 5nuE SETUP FILE SAVE SAVE SETUP oa L1 SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE HRHE LEM E SAUE FILE HRHE LEN FILE HRHE LEM E SAVE SAVE Press to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE
12. C SVANTEK SVAN 956 No 12001 2007 07 20 v6 05 6 05 2 1432593227 TITLE 20JUL SETTINGS mamma Gh DINGS mme Device VIBR METER TYIDUU S ee vex kx et Accelerometer Device function LEVEL METER EVEL METER version 6 05 Meas start date 2007 07 20 eas start hour 17 01 00 Ranee s s ads o et HIGH Ref level for Acc 1 um s2 Ref level for Vel 1 nm s Ref level for Dil 1 pm Measure trigger Off Logger trigger Off Repeat cycle 1 Start delay ls Integration time 10 s factor 20 0 dB Calibration by Sensitivity Calibration date 2007 07 20 Calibration hour 16 38 20 RMS integration Linear Profile 1 2 3 Profile 1 2 3 Filter HP1 HP3 HP10 Detector 14 05 1 05 1 05 Logger None PEAK PEAK RMS RMS RESULTS Measurement tim 00 00 10 Prof 1 2 3 8 61 m s2 6 24 m s2 4 90 m s2 P P 12 7 m s2 10 0 m s2 7 67 m s2 8 5 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL MAX 2 04 m s2 1 35 m s2 624 mm s2 RMS 1 33 m s2 923 mm s2 452 mm s2 Example of the printed results from the VLM mode A4 format The following confirmation question is displayed after the printing if the Prompt parameter was selected in the EJECT P path MENU OPTIONS EJECT P The user has to answer in this case if the paper in the printer has to be ejected to the new page The change of the available answers is possi
13. R2 R1 Z HP1 HP3 10 Vel3 Vel10 VelMF Dil Dil3 01110 W Bxy W Bz H A W Bc KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb DETECTOR available values of the detector time constant used in the second profile o 100ms 125ms 200ms 500ms 1 0s 2 0s 5 0s 10 0s LOGGER available measurement results which has to be saved in the instrument s logger from the second profile o PEAK P P MAX RMS PROFILE 3 sub list FILTER available digital weighting filters used in the third profile during the measurements o R2 R1 Z HP1 HP3 HP10 Vel3 Vel10 VelMF Dil Dil3 01110 W Bxy W Bz H A W Bc KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb DETECTOR available values of the detector time constant used in the third profile o 100ms 125ms 200ms 500ms 1 0s 2 0s 5 0s 10 0s LOGGER available measurement results which has to be saved in the instrument s logger from the third profile o PEAK P P MAX RMS gt SPECTRUM sub list this sub list is not available in the case of the VLM it appears on the display in the case of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analyser e FILTER position only Z filter is available for 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis BAND FULL e LOGGER position it enables the user to save RMS results from 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE measurement function available values or N gt sub list this sub list appears on the display in the case of the FFT analyser AVERAGING position it
14. 6 1 Selection of the modes of measurement results presentation DISPLAY MODES The DISPLAY MODES sub list enables one the selection of the currently available modes of displaying the results of measurement The selection is made by placing or replacing the special 6 1 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL character in the inversely displayed position of the DISPLAY MODES sub list by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the ENTER push button The mode of the results presentation is related with the selection of the instrument s function VLM 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT analyser etc Only One Profile mode cannot be switched off independently from the current mode of the instrument For the Vibration Level Meter the following possibilities of the measurement results presentation are available One Profile 3 PROFILES LOGGER time history FILE INFO oa L1 DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY MODES SPECTRUM 3 PROFILES LOGGER FILE IMFO SPECTRUM 3 PROFILES LOGGER FILE IMFO SPECTRUM 3 PROFILES LOGGER FILE IMFO a b DISPLAY MODES windows VM The LOGGER mode of results presentation is available if and only if the data from at least one profile are logged in the logger s file If the LOGGER position is switched on V but there was nothing stored in the logger s file in the selected profile there were selected results PEAK
15. CURRENT windows the supply selection nn n eene nennen nennen nee 9 9 SETUP list the REFERENCE LEVELS text highlighted displayed 9 9 REFERENCE LEVELS windows the reference level setting of acceleration signal eese 9 9 REFERENCE LEVEL windows setting the reference level of velocity signal eee 9 10 REFERENCE LEVELS windows setting the reference level of displacement signal sss 9 10 SETUP list the REMOTE COMMUNICATION text highlighted displayed inversely e 9 10 REMOTE COMMUNICATION windows the TYPE selection nasa 9 10 REMOTE COMMUNICATION windows packet size selection 9 11 SETUP list with the RMS INTEGRATION text highlighted displayed inversely esses 9 11 Displays and with the available options of the RMS 9 11 SETUP list the RPM MEASUREMENT text highlighted displayed inversely sss 9 12 Displays during the entering of the access code to a 9 12 INPUT list after activation of the RPM MEASUREMENT function seen nennen 9 12 SETUP list the RS232 text highlighted displayed inversely sse 9 12 RS232 windows the possible settings of
16. FACKET PACKET EERS a RENOTE COM RENOTE COM YPE PACKET PACKET PACKET EELCENENENI REMOTE COMMUNICATION windows packet size selection 9 8 Detector s type selection in the RMS calculations RMS INTEGRATION The RMS INTEGRATION enables the user to select the detector type for the calculations of the RMS function In order to enter the position the user has to select the RMS INTEGRATION text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER EXTERHRL 170 SETUP IEFE CURRENT MICROPHONE REFEREHCE LEWELS REMOTE COMMUNICATION RMS SETUP list with the RMS INTEGRATION text highlighted displayed inversely Two options are available LINEAR and EXPONENTIAL The required parameter can be selected by means of the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the lt ENTER gt with the confirmation of a change made in the position or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring a change made the position oa oa RMS INTEGRATION RMS INTEGRATION LINEAR 1 LINEAR Dk EXPONENTIAL C 1 EXPONENTIAL Displays and with the available options of the RMS INTEGRATION The formulae used for the RMS calculation are given in Appendix D Setting LINEAR is required for getting th
17. m REPORT H L PRIHT RESULTS PRINT LOGGER Ho results PRINT USER FILTERS PRINT CATALOGUE PRESS ANY a PRINT FILE Printing NT Li PRINT USER FILTERS PRINT CATALOGUE a TITLE RESULTS PRINT LOGGER Printing PRINT USER FILTERS PRINT CATALOGUE n PRIHT U FILTERS U FILTER printing PRINT CATALOGUE PRINT LOGGER OUT PRINT RF PRESS ANY a PRINT CATALOGUE printing a REPORT PRINT FILES gt PRINT LOGGER FORMAT PRINT USER FILTERS EJECT P Hone PRINT CRTRL a OPTIONS a OPTIONS FORMAT Control diagram of the REPORT list files stored 2 gt SVAN 956 USER MANUAL SETUP one of the main lists available after pressing the MENU push button LANGUAGE it allow the user to choose the instrument s interface language available values GERMAN ENGLISH SPANISH ITALIAN FLEMISH FRENCH HUNGARIAN POLISH RUSSIAN TURKISH CLEAR SETUP it enables the user to return to the factory settings of the instrument the confirmation has to be done before the execution of this function Are you sure EXTERNAL I O SETUP MODE e ANALOG OUT DIRECT D A if set to active the next line appears SOURCE available sources A C Z R1 R2 R3 1 00 Hz 2 00 Hz 4 00 Hz 20 kHz DIGITAL IN FUNCTION EXT TRIGGER
18. 6 9 Displays in 1 1 OCTAVE SPECTRUM 3x 4x and 5x 20 0 6 9 Displays 1 3 OCTAVE SPECTRUM 2 4x and 5x 7 2 200222224210 0 0000010000 6 9 Displays in FFT SPECTRUM Ix 2x 4x and 5x X ZOOM nennen nennen entente ener 6 10 Displays with the grid switched on and off teen nennen reidet e ieia To trennen teen 6 10 Displays with the grid switched on and Off eee ee sss neret een rennen 6 10 DISPLAY SETUP window the SPECTRUM TYPE text 6 10 SPECTRUM TYPE windows with the available values eeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeneenen enne eene 6 11 DISPLAY SETUP window the SPECTRUM VIEW text highlighted sss 6 11 SPECTRUM VIEW windows the VIEW 6 11 SPECTRUM VIEW windows the TYPE 6 11 SPECTRUM VIEW windows the MAX 1 6 12 SPECTRUM VIEW windows the MIN selection etnies esent tenni nnns sese 6 12 DISPLAY SETUP window the TOTAL VALUES text highlighted esee 6 12 TOTAL VALUES windows the weighting filters selection in 5 nene 6 12 TOTAL VALUES windows in VM the TOTALx selected 2 0000000 0 1 00000000
19. 9 4 SETUP list the CLEAR SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely see 9 4 Displays with the request for the confirmation for the CLEAR SETUP 2 000 9 4 Displays during and after the execution of CLEAR SETUP function 9 4 SETUP list the EXTERNAL I O SETUP text 9 5 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the MODE 9 5 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows D A 9 5 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the source selection for D A option 9 6 MEASURE TRIGGER windows the EXT I O 9 6 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the FUNCTION 9 6 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the POLARISATION 9 7 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the ACTIVE LEVEL selection eese 9 7 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the SOURCE selection 9 7 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the ALARM LEVEL setting nennen eene 9 8 SETUP list the HUMAN VIB text highlighted displayed inversely seen 9 8 Displays during the entering of the access code to a function 9 8 SETUP list the CURRENT text highlighted displayed 1 see 9 8
20. Insert 1 SH Insert FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons SAVE FILE 2500 SAVE SAVE FILE 2508 SAUE SAVE FILE 250 SAVE SAVE FILE 7608 SRUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC ta SKIF SHi Delete SH Insert FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt push buttons Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIF S5H Delete 5H Inzert 5H Delete SH gt Irnsert Delete SH Insert The edited name is accepted and the file is saved after pressing the ENTER push button The special warning is displayed in the case the file with the edited name already exists in the memory The instrument waits then for a reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the lt ALT gt one SAVE FILE SAVE SAVE O PTIOHZ LOAL DELETE DELETE ALL DEF RAGMENTAT IDH Press ENTER to SAVE agucTo used Press ESC to SKIF SH Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY oa SAVE SAVE FILE 2307S FILE 80 ELT NI S80CTO EE OFTIOHS Saved DELETE Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIF DELETE ALL Press UP to EDIT SH Delete 5 gt 55 ANY KEY DEFRAGMENTATION Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAV
21. LOGGER FILES 1 ETUP FILES iL DIRECTORY 257 a Press EHTER to COPY RESULT FILES selection to the execution of the COPY FILES TO USB operation a the RESULT LOGGER and SETUP files selected to the execution of the COPY FILES TO USB operation b LOGGER FILES 1E TUP FILES ETUP FILES DIRECTORY 25JAH DIRECTORY 25JAH Fress EHTER to COPY b Fress EHTER to COPY After pressing the lt ENTER gt push button the instrument checks its current state When the measurements are performed the execution of the COPY FILES TO USB operation is not allowed In such case the message is displayed for a few seconds and the instrument returns to the FILE list MEASUREMENT PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If the measurements are not performed the instrument starts the operation After the operation Files Copied O K message is presented on the display If a file has been already copied to the USB stick a message ALREADY EXIST is presented on the display as well as the name of the file COPY FILES 26 RLRERDY EXISTS ww s P File Copied PRESS ANY KEY b a Display after the execution of COPY FILES TO USB operation a and when the file exists already b 7 37 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 7 13 Moving files to the USB memory stick MOVE FILES TO USB The MOVE FILES TO USB is used for moving files from int
22. lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed After this confirmation the opened window or list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the opened window or list the user has to press the lt ESC gt push button L SETUP SETUP REFERENCE LEWELS SIGHRL GENERATOR CLEAR SETUP REMOTE TIMER EXTERHRL 170 SETUP RMS IHTEGRHTIUH USB HOST PORT HUMAH FILT RS232 USER FILTERS CURRENT RTC WIBRATION UNITS REFERENCE LEWELS SETUP list 9 1 Setting the language of the user interface LANGUAGE The LANGUAGE enables one to select the language of the user interface In order to enter the list one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed LANGUAGE text of the SETUP list The selection is made by placing a special character by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons in the line with the selected language Pressing the lt SHIFT gt and or lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt push buttons results in a movement to the first position of the opened list and pressing the lt SHIFT gt and v or lt 5 gt and lt gt gt results in a movement to the last position of the opened list The selection is confirmed and the list is closed after pressing the ENTER push button The list is closed without any confirmation after pressing the lt ESC gt push button CLEAR SETUP EXTERHRL 170 SETUP
23. m s ma Sa 51 Hz dB Hz dB Hz dB 0 80 25 00 40 0 800 00 10 0 1 00 100 0 31 50 50 0 1000 00 0 0 1 25 90 0 40 00 60 0 1250 00 10 0 1 60 80 0 50 00 70 0 1600 00 20 0 2 00 70 0 63 00 80 0 2000 00 30 0 2 50 60 0 80 00 90 0 2500 00 40 0 3 15 50 0 100 00 100 0 3150 00 50 0 4 00 40 0 125 00 90 0 4000 00 60 0 5 00 30 0 160 00 80 0 5000 00 70 0 6 30 20 0 200 00 70 0 6300 00 80 0 8 00 10 0 250 00 60 0 8000 00 90 0 10 00 0 0 315 00 50 0 10000 00 100 0 12 50 10 0 400 00 40 0 12500 00 16 00 20 0 500 00 30 0 16000 00 20 00 30 0 630 00 20 0 20000 00 Example of the printed coefficients of the user filter S1 format 4 C SVANTEK SVAN 956 No 12001 2007 08 18 v6 06 6 06 3 16 32 37 Vibration meter mode filter 52 S2 Hz dB Hz dB 0 80 160 00 1 0 7 5070 200 00 1 0 1 25 250 00 1 0 1 60 315 00 3 0 2 00 0 0 400 00 3 0 2 50 0 0 500 00 3 0 3 15 0 0 630 00 1 0 4 00 0 0 800 00 1 0 5 00 0 0 1000 00 1 0 6 30 0 0 1250 00 1 0 8 00 0 0 1600 00 1 0 8 10 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 10 00 0 0 2000 00 0 0 12 50 0 0 2500 00 0 0 16 00 0 0 3150 00 0 0 20 00 0 0 4000 00 0 0 25 00 0 0 5000 00 0 0 31 50 0 0 6300 00 0 0 40 00 0 0 8000 00 0 0 50 00 0 0 10000 00 INF 63 00 0 0 12500 00 INF 80 00 0 0 16000 00 INF 100 00 1 0 20000 00 INF 125
24. Ll DELETE ALL DELETE ALL RESULT FILES Ll RESULT FILES 1 L GGER FILES ubl L GGER FILES IG SETUP FILES E SETUP FILES 1 Press ENTER to DELETE Press ENTER to DELETE LOGGER FILES selected to the execution of the DELETE ALL operation After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the execution of the DELETE ALL operation is not possible In such case the message is displayed for a few seconds and the instruments returns to the FILE list 7 22 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL MEASUREMENT PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If the measurements are not performed the instrument requests the confirmation of the operation after entering this window after pressing the ENTER push button After next pressing the lt ENTER gt push button when the NO option is selected the window is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list The selection of the NO or YES option is possible using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the FILE list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button DELETE RLL DELETE RLL Displays with the confirmation window during the execution of the DELETE ALL operation All files from the selected type are deleted after the ENTER push button pressing when the YES option is selected The message i
25. S5H Delete 5 1 5H Inserz2 5Hz Delete SH gt Irsers LOGGER NAME edition in MEASUREMENT SETUP The edited name is accepted and the file is saved after pressing the ENTER push button The special warning is displayed in the case the file with the edited name already exists in the memory The instrument waits then for a reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the ALT one oa oa MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP REP CYCLE Inf PREP CYCLE Inf REP CYCLE Inf LOGGER on LOGGER on INCORRECT LOGGER LOGGER STEP LOGGER STEP LOGGER NAME LOGGER STEP LOGGER aoa LOGGER LOGGER song SH Delete SH Inserz 5H Delete SH Inserz PRESS ANY KEV SH Delete SH gt Inser gt Displays during the attempt of overwriting the existing file The main measurement results cf App RMS VDV OVL MTVV MAX for LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT and ENVELOPING are calculated in the period set in the INTEGR PERIOD These results can be saved in the result files of the instrument s memory by means of the SAVE or SAVE NEXT function path MENU FILE SAVE In the case the INTEGR PERIOD is greater than 9 seconds it can be done also by means of the AUTO SAVE operation The name of the file for that operation is set in the FILE NAME window path MENU FILE AUTO SAVE F
26. The BAND position enables the user to select the band in which the narrow band analysis of the signal has to be performed The user has the following possibilities 22 4 kHz 11 2 kHz 5 6 kHz 2 8 kHz 1 4 kHz 700 Hz 350 Hz 175 Hz and 87 5 Hz The selection of the required value is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the change made in the line requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The FFT window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt 5 gt push button FFT FFT FFT AVERAGING dud AVERAGING dud AVERAGING LINEAR AVERABING LIHERR BET HRHHIMG 1928 AVERAGING LINEAR LINEAR FILTER aum cem FILTER s Airs HRMMIMG 1920 1 FFT window the BAND selection 5 5 4 Selecting the time window for the FFT analysis WINDOW The WINDOW position enables the user to select the coefficients of time window which are used in the FFT analysis Available time windows of the FFT analysis are as follows HANNING RECTANGLE FLAT TOP KAISER BESSEL The selection of the window is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the change made in the line requires pressing the lt ENTER gt push button which simultaneously closes the window The FFT window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button SV
27. The position of the character be changed using the v push buttons After placing the character in the line with the function s name the user has to press the ENTER push button The window for entering the access code to a function is opened in the first essay of its execution after pressing the ENTER push button in the case when a function was not purchased together with the instrument 3 27 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL VALID CODE oa ENTER CODE ENTER CODE E 97124119 SH Delete SH Insert SHi Delete 5H Insert PRESS ANY KEY Displays during the entering of the access code to a function A Notice The number of the attempts for the access code entering is limited After three unsuccessful essays the possibility is blocked The introduction of the access code is performed in the same way as the edition of the other text variables using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the selection of the character s position the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons the Insert function the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt push buttons the Delete function and the lt A gt v push buttons the codes of characters The verification is made after pressing the ENTER push button If the entered code was wrong the message is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user After pressing the ENTER or the lt 5 gt push button the information that
28. oa LOAD SETUP HO FILES Display during the execution of the LOAD SETUP operation The current number of the setup file and the total number of the saved setup files is displayed in the first line of the LOAD SETUP window The name of the file is displayed in the second line its current number is presented in the first line The date and time of the SAVE SETUP operation is displayed in the fourth and fifth line respectively The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The first file is available after pressing the lt lt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or v with lt SHIFT gt and the last one is displayed after pressing the lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or A with lt SHIFT gt LOAD SETUP LOAD SETUP LOAD SETUP LOAD SETUP 7 18 18 HO EST ILE HO 318 FILE HO FA Exemplary contents of the LOAD SETUP window The name of the file is accepted and the file is loaded after pressing the ENTER push button The message with the name of the selected file is displayed during the execution of the loading operation The next message is displayed after successful end of loading operation The instrument waits 7 35 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the SHIFT or ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list
29. 20 0kHz 16 0kHz 12 5Hz 10 0kHz 8 00kHz 6 30kHz 5 00kHz 4 00Hz 3 15Hz 2 50kHz 2 00kHz 1 60kHz 1 25kHz 1600Hz 800Hz ENVELOPING ENVELOPING ENVELOPING ENVELOPING E FEMNA OZZ dkHz 1688 ENVELOPING ENVELOPING window the FILTER selection 5 7 2 Selecting the band during the enveloping analysis BAND The BAND position enables the user to select the band in which the ENVELOPING of the signal has to be calculated Available values of the bands of the ENVELOPING as follows 22 4kHz 11 2kHz 5 6kHz 2 8kHz 1 4kHz 700Hz 350Hz 175Hz 87 5Hz 44Hz 22Hz This parameter changes decreases automatically due to the centre frequency value selected in the FILTER position 5 24 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The selection of this parameter is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the change made in the line requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The FFT window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt 5 gt push button oa oa oa oa ENVELOPING ENVELOPING ENVELOPING ENVELOPING FILTER ZH HkHz FILTER ZH HkHz FILTER ZH HkHz FILTER ZH HkHz BHHD FENE BHHD BHHD EAE i LIHES 16668 LIHES 1666 LIHES a LIHES 16668 oa a oa ENVELOPING ENVELOPING ENVELOPING ENVELOPING FILTER 28 kHz FILTER 28 kHz FILTER 28 kHz 20 B
30. 6mrfst Frofilecz E Frofiletci b 15M odbi Displays in 3 PROFILES display mode with the measurements results which are from LEVEL METER mode continuous lines b and with the results which are not from the LEVEL METER dotted lines a A Notice See next chapters for more details concerning different settings More data about the instrument s state are given by means of the icon s row visible in the top of the display Paper sheet Battery Computer Antenna Tree Loudspeaker Headphone Envelope Bell Timer and Arrows The meanings of the icons are as follows Dnraisuaco 2 rt RMS 1 08 HP1 Profileci Display with all available icons Paper sheet icon is displayed when the USB disk or IrDA is connected to the instrument Profile 1 gt Display with sheet icon Battery is displayed when the instrument is powered from the batteries icon corresponds to the batteries state three two one or none vertical bars in side of the icon When voltage of batteries is too low the icon is flashing 3 24 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Profile 1 gt Display with Battery icon Computer is displayed when there is the USB connection with the PC the icon is flashing during RT Real Time transmission 1 12 Display with Computer icon Antenna icon is displayed a flashing mode togeth
31. BATTERY USB POWER and EXTERNAL POWER UNIT LABEL it informs the user about the type of the instrument the serial number of the unit the internal memory size available measurement modes and its software version and the standards which the instrument fulfils SVAN 956 USER MANUAL m HEHU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE FUNCT IOM DISPLAY MODES LI D LAY j INPUT OGGER VIEW SPECTRUM SCREEN SETUP TOTAL VALUES GRID t EATTERY LOGGER VIEW B UNIT LABEL DISPLRY SETUP DISPLAY Eu SPECTRUM TOTAL URLUES LOGGER UIEM FULL INSTANTANEOUS Lut Lu DISPLRY SETUP BISPLAY SCALE LOGGER VIEW SPECTRUM DISPLRY SETUP TOTAL 1 DISPLAY SCALE SPECTRUM UIEM FILTER SPECTRUM TYPE TYPE ACC TOTAL CAL F LOGGER UIEM TOTAL 1 FILTER a DISPLAY SETUP LOGGER VIEW OISPLAY SCALE SPECTRUM VIEW VIEW Jat SPECTRUM TYPE TIME AL TIME a LOGGER VIEW VIEW a TIME Control diagram of the DISPLAY SETUP sublist in 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of vibration 8 11 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL FUHCTION THPUT 3 12 a DISPLRY DISPLRY HDDES LAY SI SPECTRUM LOGGER UIEU 3 PROFILES SCREEH SETUP STATISTICS BATTERY LOGGER UNIT LABEL FILE INFO DISPLRY HDDES SPECTRUM 3 PROFILES STATISTICS LOGGER FILE INFO DISP
32. DIGITAL OUT FUNCTION TRIG PULSE POLARISATION POS NEG ALARM PULSE ACTIVE LEVEL LOW HIGH SOURCE PEAK 1 SPL 1 LEQ 1 ALARM LEVEL available values 30 0 dB 140 dB HUMAN VIB FILT it enables the user to activate human vibration filters with a special code after activation of human vibration filter this position is taken off from the menu IEPE CURRENT it enables the user to select current IEPE supply available values 1 5 mA or 4 5 mA REFERENCE LEVELS inthe case of vibration measurements e it enables the user to set the reference level of the acceleration for the logarithmic scale the results expressed in dB decibels available levels are from 1 um s2 to 100 um s e VEL it enables the user to set the reference level of the velocity for the logarithmic scale the results expressed in dB decibels available levels are from 1 nm s to 100 nm s e DIL it enables the user to set the reference level of the displacement for the logarithmic scale the results expressed in dB decibels available levels are from 1 pm to 100 pm REMOTE COMMUNICATION available values OFF CONTINUOUS PACKET PACKET available values 64 128 256 512 1024 RMS INTEGRATION RMS INTEGRATION available values of detector s type LINEAR or EXPONENTIAL RPM MEASUREMENT it enables the user to activate rotation measurement option once activated the option is any longer present in the SETUP list RS
33. It is because erased file was somewhere in the file s space The file is no longer accessible but the recuperated memory is still unused for the next saving This memory becomes available after the defragmentation process path MENU FILE DEFRAGMENTATION in which all files are moved to the continuous space In order to illustrate it let us consider the result file named QEXAMPA which is 1946 bytes long 7 16 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL oa FILE INFO FILE HAME ESANPS FILE SIZE 19466 GEXRHP4 DATE 26 MAR 2087 SOUND gt lt ENTER gt gt Deleted 0 44 44 ELAPSED TIME 8 G8 18 PRESS ANY a a a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE es AVAILABLE FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE 15798734 bytes 15851526 bytes 15795754 bytes 15851526 bytes Execution of the EXAMP4 file deletion and the influence of this process on the memory space After removing EXAMP4 from the memory only the TOTAL AVAILABLE is increased path MENU FILE FREE SPACE FILE GEXAMPS E CSOUMDI Deleted 34 PRESS ANY a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE ei TOTAL AWAILABLE Execution of the 5 file deletion and the influence of this process the memory space The displays above illustrates the erasing from the flash memory another file named EXAMP5 which was also 1946 bytes long the FILES FREE SPACE LOGGER FRE
34. N 1 T to N 1 T to NT amp logger1 svn time history PEAK MAX MIN or RMS LOGGER STEP Relations between INTEGR PERIOD and LOGGER STEP 5 2 Measurement range setting MEASUREMENT RANGE The MEASUREMENT RANGE is used to set one of the available measurement ranges in the instrument In order to open this window the user has to select the MEASUREMENT RANGE text in the INPUT list by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one IHPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 TRIGGER SETUP INPUT list with the MEASUREMENT RANGE selected There are two ranges available HIGH and LOW The detailed description of the measurement ranges parameters is given in App C The change of the input range is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button the change is confirmed and the window closes The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made in the sub list is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button 5 7 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL MEASUR RANGE MEASUR RANGE RANGE RANGE pio RMS RMS 16 mms l 41mm z 1 amp m s Si6mm sB 1 HBkm s 31l Emms i14ilm s MEASUREMENT RANGE windows the RANGE selection The range values change due to the calibration factor BY SENSITIVITY HERSUR RANGE 5 RANGE RAN
35. PROFILE 2 and PROFILE 3 selected esee 5 8 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter in acceleration measurements 2 2 5 9 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter in velocity measurements a 5 9 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter in displacement measuremennts ss 5 9 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the R2 weighting 5 9 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the RMS detector nennen enne eren 5 10 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL PROFILE x windows the PEAK result to be not saved or saved in a logger s file sss 5 10 PROFILE x windows the MAX result to be not saved or saved in a logger s 2 24 44022222 2 5 11 PROFILE x windows P P result to be not saved or saved in a logger s file esses 5 11 PROFILE x windows the RMS result to be not saved or saved in a logger s file 22222222 5 11 TRIGGER SETUP selected in the INPUT list and the TRIGGER SETUP window eee 5 12 MEASURE TRIGGER WindoWS 5 12 MEASURE TRIGGER window TRIGGER switched off 5 12 Displays during the me
36. REPORT windows with the OPTION selected 8 7 1 Selection of the format of the print out FORMAT The FORMAT enables the user to select the format of the listing 4 and 5 options are available In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed After this confirmation the OPTIONS sub list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the OPTIONS sub list the user has to press the lt 5 gt push button OPTIONS OPTIONS FORMAT FORMAT K Tasa Hone EJECT Hone OPTIONS windows the selection of the format 8 7 2 Controlling the paper ejection after print out EJECT P The EJECT P enables the user to control the ejection of the paper after the listing is done The following options are available Prompt the instrument asks whether to eject the page after printing report statistics or catalogue Auto after printing the paper is ejected and None the paper is not ejected after printing In particular it is possible to have one result after another using the None or Prompt options In the EJECT P position any change is performed by means of the lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed After this confirmation the OPTIONS sub list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the OPTIONS sub list the user has to press the lt 5 gt push button 8 13 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL L OP
37. The RPM window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button RPM window the PULSES ROTATIONS selection with 1 unit step RPM window the PULSES ROTATIONS selection with 10 unit step 5 8 3 Selecting the unit of RPM measurement UNIT The UNIT enables the user to select the unit of the measurement In this position two option are available RPM revolutions per minute and RPS revolutions per second The selection of the unit is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the change made in the position requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The RPM window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt 5 gt push button RPM window the UNIT selection 5 26 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 6 DATA AVAILABLE ON THE DISPLAY DISPLAY In order to open the DISPLAY list the user has to press the MENU push button e select from the main list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the DISPLAY text highlight it inversely e press the ENTER push button Pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt A gt or lt SHIFT gt and results in a movement to the first position of the opened list and pressing the lt SHIFT gt and v or lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt results in a movement to the last position of the opened list Dis
38. The instrument then waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the lt ALT gt one and after pressing a push button it returns to the SAVE window 7 5 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL SAVE Ho results PRESS ANY Display after the SAVE operation when there were no results for storing A Notice During the execution of the SAVE or SAVE NEXT function an additional window is displayed informing about the operation performed In the case of short files this window can be unnoticed by the user iJnHzi iJnHzi CURE OPTIOHS Press ENTER to SAUE Saving Saved DELETE Press ESC to SKIF DELETE ALL Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY DEFRAGMEHTATIOH SAVE FILE 81 JAHAL SAVE View of all displays during and after the execution of the SAVE operation As it was already written it is not possible to store the data in the file which already exists when the REPLACE is not active path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS REPLACE The presented below sequence of displays illustrates the situation when during the name edition process the user selected the name which was used before The instrument displays a special message and waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the lt ALT gt one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list SAVE FIL
39. and MEASUR FUNCTION sub list opened with all available modes b c 4 2 Measurement functions of the instrument MEASUREMENT FUNCTION In order to select the required function the user has to enter the MEASUREMENT FUNCTION sub list to select the MEASUREMENT FUNCTION text using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one when this text is displayed inversely After entering the MEASUREMENT FUNCTION sub list the set of the available functions appears on the display LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT ENVELOPING The special character marks currently active function 4 1 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL MEASUR FUNCTION LEWEL METER i i OCTAVE 175 OCTAVE FFT ENVELOPING VALID CODE a ENTER CODE 1 411 a ENTER CODE a b SH Delete SH Insert SH Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY MEASUREMENT FUNCTION windows opened a and the activation of the optional function b The main function of the instrument is the measurement of vibration level The other functions are optional and they broaden the applications of the instrument They be supported by the producer or purchased later The producer activates the optional function bought with the instrument The user should activate by himself the function purchased later The vibration LEVEL METER VLM mode provides the user with the functions of the functions of VLM meeting the ISO 8041 2005 standard Th
40. gt gt TITLE it enables the user to give the header to the printed report PRINT RESULTS it enables the user to print measurement results on the attached printer the No results text is displayed in the case when there is no results to be printed PRINT FILE it enables the user to print out on a printer connected directly to the instrument the selected file with the measurement results the NO FILES text is displayed in the case when the file memory is empty PRINT LOGGER it enables the user to print out on a printer connected directly to the instrument the measurement results in a selected file from the logger the NO LOGGERS text is displayed in the case when the instrument did not perform any measurement and the logger is empty this function is currently under development and FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE message appears on the display PRINT USER FILTERS it enables the user to print out on a printer connected directly to the instrument the values of the user filters introduced in the instrument S1 S2 S3 3 15 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL PRINT CATALOGUE in the instrument s memory OPTIONS it enables the user to print the catalogue of the FORMAT available values A4 A5 EJECT P available values None Prompt Auto FUHCTIOH 3 16 TITLE 6 Hoteli PRIN SULTS PRINT FILE PRINT LOGGER PRINT USER FILTERS PRINT CATALOGUE SH Delete SH Insert PRINT RESULTS printing
41. gt lt gt gt push button pressing lt lt gt or lt gt gt push button with the lt SHIFT gt one increases the step 20 times The confirmation is made by pressing lt ENTER gt The return to the REAL TIME FILTERS list ignoring any changes made the sub list is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button L Ri Ri Ri TYPE COUPS LOWPASS TYPE oa HFE CSdB HFECZdB Ieee HFCC3dB filter windows the HFC 3dB selection for a LOWPASS filter In the case of a high pass filter the user has to determine the LFC 3dB parameter which denotes the LFC Low Frequency Corner of the Rx filter at which the amplitude of the input signal is attenuated two times The available values of the LFC are from 10 Hz to 10 0 kHz The selection of the required value is made with lt lt gt lt gt gt push button pressing lt lt gt or lt gt gt button with the lt SHIFT gt one increases the step 20 times The confirmation is made by pressing lt ENTER gt The return to the REAL TIME FILTERS list ignoring any changes made in the sub list is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button Ri Ri Ri TYPE HIGHPASS TYPE wx irap gs LFCC3dE filter windows the LFC 3dB selection for a HIGHPASS filter 9 23 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL In the case of a band pass filter the user has to determine two frequencies the LFC 3dB w
42. lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the lt lt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button the first file is available and after pressing the lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button the last is displayed FILE HO zBJULZ TRUE UIER 1 OG FILE 210514 28 JUL 2007 17 20 22 Displays during the selection of the file to be printed The contents of the selected file is sent out to a PC after pressing the lt ENTER gt push button The following message is displayed on the display during the printing PRIHT FILE Printing Display during the execution of the PRINT FILE operation The instrument returns to the REPORT list when all data are transferred but if the Prompt parameter was selected path MENU REPORTS OPTIONS EJECT P Prompt the described in the PRINT RESULTS message is displayed on the display after the printing The user has to answer in this case if the Line Feed has to be added to the transferred data The change of the available answers is possible after pressing the lt gt gt push buttons The return to the REPORT list is performed after pressing the ENTER push button with the possible Line Feed addition FILE TIME OUT PRESS ANY Display during the file sending out when there is no data transfer 8 7 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The message about the time limit is displayed in the case when the printer or P
43. the instrument reacts on each of the START STOP push button pressing starting or stopping the measurements When the Inverse text is selected the START 5 gt push button operates in conjunction or in a sequence with the lt SHIFT gt one The measurements are started or stopped after pressing both push buttons In order to select a desired mode of the START STOP push button the lt lt gt lt gt gt should be pressed In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing the ESC push button the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored oa a SHIFT MODE SHIFT MODE SHIFT _Shift SHIFT _Shift 5 EEREN SI ASEO SHIFT MODE windows the available ST SP settings 9 13 Activation of the signal generation option SIGNAL GENERATOR The SIGNAL GENERATOR position enables the user to activate the built in signal generator This function is under development In order to enter the sub list the user has to select the SIGNAL GENERATOR text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one L SETUP RMS INTEGRATION RPM MEASUREMENT RS232 RTC SHIFT MODE SETUP list the SIGNAL GENERATOR selected highlighted inversely Hot available PRESS ANY KEY Display in the opened SIGNAL GENERATOR window 9 15 SVAN 956
44. 00 0 0 Example of the printed coefficients of the user filter S2 format A5 8 6 Printing of the file s catalogue PRINT CATALOGUE The PRINT CATALOGUE enables the user to print the catalogue of the files stored in the instrument on the attached printer In order to enter the position the user has to select the PRINT CATALOGUE text in the REPORT list using the A v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER RESULTS FILE L GGER USER FILTERS CATALOGUE REPORT windows with the PRINT CATALOGUE selected After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the printing is impossible and the message is displayed HERSUREHEHT PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress After pressing the lt ENTER gt push button the following message is displayed PRINT CATALOGUE Printing Display in the REPORT list the execution of the PRINT CATALOGUE When the message is on the display the data are transferred from the instrument to the attached printer The instrument returns to the REPORT list after transferring all data but if the Prompt parameter was selected in the EJECT P path MENU REPORT OPTIONS EJECT P the confirmation question is displayed after the printing The user has to answer in this case if the pa
45. 06 6 06 3 16 36 59 CATALOGUE CONTENTS umber of files 15 ame Mf Length Date Time RES1 lt Vo gt 426 07 08 17 17 59 RES2 lt Vo gt 426 07 08 17 17 59 RES3 lt Vo gt 426 07 08 17 17 59 RES4 lt Vo gt 426 07 08 17 17 59 RES5S lt Vo gt 426 07 08 17 17 59 RES6 lt Vo gt 426 07 08 17 17 59 57 Vo 426 07 08 17 18 00 RES8 lt Vo gt 426 07 08 17 18 00 QRES9 Vo 426 07 08 17 18 00 RES10 lt Vo gt 426 07 08 17 18 00 11 Vo 426 07 08 17 18 00 RES12 V1 380 07 08 17 18 00 RES13 V1 380 07 08 17 18 01 RES14 V1 380 07 08 17 18 01 5 0 lt gt 2280 07 08 17 18 05 Example of the printed catalogue format A5 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL When the catalogue of the files is empty the measurement results were not saved the instrument returns to the REPORT list without any reaction PRINT CATALOGUE TIME OUT PRESS ANY Display during the catalogue printing when there is no data transfer 8 7 Selection of the printing options OPTIONS Using the OPTIONS the user can select the format of the listing FORMAT can control the way the paper is ejected in the printer EJECT P In order to enter the position the user has to select the OPTIONS text in the REPORT list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the lt ENTER gt PRIHT RESULTS PRIHT FILE PRINT LOGGER PRIHT USER FILTERS PRINT CATALOGUE
46. 1 scale n n nee eene enne tenes 2 7 Rear panel of the SVAN 956 instrument in 1 1 scale n eene nennen een eene ener eene 2 8 Displays with the highlighted elements of the main 164 2 22 2 0 10 000 3 1 Display with the recently accessed menu items after double pressing of the MENU push button 3 1 Displays with the main list a and the elements of the INPUT list b as 3 2 MEASUREMENT SETUP window opened path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP 3 2 MEASUREMENT SETUP window the INTEGR PERIOD position accessible see 3 2 Displays with the accessed INTEGR PERIOD position after pressing the lt lt gt or lt gt gt push buttons Je G M 3 2 Displays after three consecutive pressing of the lt ESC gt push button from the MEASUR SETUP sub list 3 2 Displays during and after the accessing the FREE SPACE window path MENU FILE FREE SPACE 3 3 Displays during the edition of the text which has to be printed as a header in the measurement reports path MENU REPORT TITLE iiio ee t boto t 3 3 Control diagram of the FUNCTION list enne tene E trennen trente eterne enne enne 3 4 Control diagram of the INPUT list in the 1 1
47. 12 E i Measurement results presented after pressing the lt A gt or Y push buttons In the case when from a profile more than one result was saved in the logger s file the other results are presented after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons together with the lt ALT gt one Results saved from a profile presented after pressing the lt lt gt or lt gt gt and ALT push buttons After pressing the lt A gt or v and ALT push buttons the VIEW is changed path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP LOGGER VIEW VIEW So after pressing these push buttons and then repeating the previous sequence the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons together with the ALT one the user can observe the displays presented below Results saved from a profile presented after pressing the lt lt gt or lt gt gt and ALT push buttons Another measurement is started after next pressing of the lt START STOP gt push button The measurement is stopped after the selected INTEGR PERIOD path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP INTEGR PERIOD names of the next saved files are automatically incremented by one The same remarks are valid in this case as it was already stated in the description of the SAVE NEXT function 7 2 4 Direct access to the SAVE SAVE NEXT function DIRECT SAVE The DIRECT SAVE enables one to select the instrument s reaction on the simultaneous pressing of the ENTER and ALT push
48. 14 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The TIME enables the user to select the time to be presented with the logger s file results The REAL TIME selection means that on the display the real time is visible while AVAILABLE TIME means that time after which the loggers memory will be filled up by the current measurement result is given there The selection is made using the lt gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER for the confirmation Displays with the possible values of the TIME parameter 6 3 Selection of the logger s file to the display presentation LOGGER VIEW The LOGGER enables the user to examine the contents of the logger files In order to open this window the user has to press the ENTER push button when the LOGGER VIEW text is displayed inversely a DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES UNIT LABEL DISPLAY list the LOGGER VIEW text highlighted In the first line the available still loggers memory is displayed followed by e The selected number of the logger s and the number of all saved files FILE NO e The name of the logger s file LOG FILE e The number of the records in the file which name is displayed in the previous line RECORDS The results saved if any are present in the logger from the first profile P 1 Theresults saved if any are present in the logger from the second profile P 2 The results saved if any are present in the logger from the third profile P 3 e The type of
49. 18 5 5 Selection of FFT analysis parameters FFT 5 20 5 5 1 The averaging of spectra in the FFT analysis AVERAGING 5 21 5 5 2 Weighting filter during the FFT analysis FILTER 5 21 5 5 3 Selecting the analysis band of the signal BAND 5 21 5 5 4 Selecting the time window for the FFT analysis WINDOW 5 21 5 5 5 Selecting the number of the lines of FFT analysis LINES 5 22 5 5 6 Enabling the FFT spectra time history logging LOGGER 5 22 5 6 Selection of 1 1 octave and 1 3 octave spectrum parameters SPECTRUM 5 22 5 6 1 Selecting the weighting filter during 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis FILTER5 23 5 6 2 Selecting the band during the 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis BAND 5 23 5 6 3 Activation of logger for 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis results LOGGER 5 23 5 7 Selection of enveloping parameters ENVELOPING 5 23 5 7 1 Selecting the weighting filter during the enveloping calculation FILTER 5 24 5 7 2 Selecting the band during the enveloping analysis BAND 5 24 5 7 3 Selecting the number of the lines in enveloping spectrum LINES 5 25 5 8 Selection of RPM measurements parameters RPM 5 25 5 8 1 Switching on the RPM measurement RPM 5 26 5 8 2 Selecting the number of pulses rotations PULSE ROTATION 5 26 5 8 3 Selecting the unit of RPM measurement UNIT 5 26 6 DATA AVAILABLE ON THE DISPLAY DISPLAY 6 1 6 1 Selection of the modes of measurement results presentation DISPLAY MODES 6 1 6 1 1 Switching on off spectrum vie
50. 5 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP START DELAY 1s INTEGR PERIOD is C Inf Or GER STEP LOGGER amp LOG12 LOGGER STEP setting available values from 500 milliseconds to 1 hour 5 1 6 Logger file name edition LOGGER NAME The LOGGER NAME enables the user to name the logger file The default one is amp LOG The name cannot be longer than eight characters including not edited first one character amp After entering this line the special help is displayed in the display s last line The name edition is performed similarly to the name edition in the FILE NAME line of the SAVE or SAVE SETUP window The edition process is presented below The displayed inversely character is currently edited The lt lt gt lt gt gt lt A gt lt gt and lt SHIFT gt push buttons are used for editing the name One can select the proper position of the character in the edited text using the lt gt gt push buttons The available ASCII characters be changed using the A or v gt push button pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one The subsequent digits underline big letters and space appear on the display in the inversely displayed position after each pressing of the mentioned above push buttons HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP Bs 5 5 LOGGER 100514 1 LOGGER amp LDG18 LOGGER
51. 956 Menu ENTER 95 1 ESC Pause J r Markers 34 L Ld e E svantek Ext Power Front panel of the SVAN 956 instrument in 1 1 scale SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 2 7 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 2 8 Acceler SVAN 956 Vibration Analyser ISO 10816 1 1995 15 8041 2005 e IEC 61260 1995 Made in Poland by SVANTEK X amp c 4xAA battery Ext USB USB Pow Host Device Serial no 10000 Rear panel of the SVAN 956 instrument 1 1 scale SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 3 SETTING THE INSTRUMENT In order to perform the measurements using the instrument the user has only to plug in the proper transducer and to switch the power on A Notice The user has to press the lt ALT gt and lt START STOP gt push buttons in parallel in order to switch the power On Off 3 1 Basis of the instrument s control The instrument is controlled by means of nine push buttons of the keyboard Using these push buttons one can access all available functions The functions are placed in the system of lists and sub lists The main list contains the headers of six lists which also contain sub lists or positions elements The main list is opened after pressing the lt MENU gt push button This list contains the following lists FUNCTION INPUT DISPLAY FILE REPORT and SETUP The elements of each list are described in details in Chapters 4 9 Only one list can be
52. E 5 22 window the LINES selection eer eerte m er td eee wes svar POP deve 5 22 FFT window the LOGGER activation eene enne enhn sten 5 22 SPECTRUM selected in the INPUT list and SPECTRUM window opened eee 5 23 SPECTRUM window the LOGGER selection n enne ener nnn sese 5 23 ENVELOPING selected in the INPUT list and the ENVELOPING window opened see 5 24 ENVELOPING window the FILTER selection 5 24 ENVELOPING window the BAND selection 5 25 ENVELOPING window the LINES selection n a tena assess enean 5 25 RPM selected in the INPUT list and the RPM window opened sese nennen 5 25 RPM window the RPM Selection ccccccccesssssscecececsesssaeceeccecsesssaecesececeenssaesecececsenaaececececeeseaasseeececeeseaaseeeeeeeeenes 5 26 RPM window PULSES ROTATIONS selection with 1 unit 5 26 RPM window PULSES ROTATIONS selection with 10 unit 5 26 RPM window the UNIT Selection ier HERR rere ere erede e ere p ve Eee aN 5 26 Display in the m
53. Exemplary settings made for the desired execution of the TIMER function The instrument will be switched on the 1 of February at 13 25 and will be warmed up for the period of 60 seconds decrementing by one after each second the counter visible on the display n ae HARM UP TIME HARM UP TIME Please wait 33s Please wait 45 XESC to skip ESC to skip Counting down during the warming up of the instrument after switching it on After warming up the instrument and the preset DELAY time the measurements are performed for a period of ten seconds Then the results are saved in the file which name was given or accepted the proper information is displayed and finally the instrument is switched off 1 6 1 Pil 3 13 Profilecia 14 52 Displays during the executing of the TIMER function timer icon is active 9 18 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL A Notice instrument s TIMER function be used for multiply measurements at the programmed day and time with the selected repetition The first switch on of the instrument must be within one month ahead 9 15 Selection the USB HOST port functionality USB HOST PORT The USB HOST PORT enables one to programme the functionality of the instrument s socket named USB Host In order to enter the position the user has to select the USB HOST PORT text in the SETUP list using the A v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTE
54. FILE NAME skipping and return to the SAVE OPTION sub list When the integration period is too short for switching on the AUTO SAVE option the following message appears on the display IMT FERIUD TOO SHORT AUTO SAVE DISABLED PRESS ANY Display after attempt of switching on AUTO SAVE option with too short INT PERIOD The FILE NAME window is closed after pressing the ENTER push button with the confirmation of the AUTO SAVE function switched on and the user interface returns to the FILE list a FILE NAME DELETE RLL DEFRERGMEHTRT ICH S5H Delete 5H Insert CRTHLO GUE Displays during the execution of the AUTO SAVE switching on the FILE NAME confirmation and return to the FILE list The edition of the file name in the FILE NAME window is performed almost in the same way as it was described in the case of the SAVE SAVE NEXT function The displayed inversely character is currently edited The lt lt gt lt gt gt lt lt gt lt gt gt and lt SHIFT gt push buttons are used for editing the name which cannot exceed eight characters including the starting special character which cannot be edited One can select the proper position of the character in the edited text using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The available ASCII characters can be changed using the lt A gt or v push button pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one Additionally the character be also cha
55. FILTERS 9 16 1 Introduction the parameters of real time filters REAL TIME FILTERS 9 16 2Setting filter coefficients for octave analysis SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS 9 17 Selection of the vibration units VIBRATION UNITS 9 18 Warnings selection WARNINGS 9 18 1Saving the measurement results in a file RESULTS NOT SAVED 9 18 2Checking free space on the USB disk USB DISK FREE SP 9 18 3Minimum USB disk memory free space setting MIN FREE SPACE 9 5 9 6 9 6 9 7 9 7 9 7 9 8 9 8 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 11 9 11 9 12 9 12 9 12 9 13 9 13 9 14 9 14 9 15 9 15 9 16 9 16 9 16 9 17 9 17 9 17 9 18 9 19 9 22 9 22 9 24 9 27 9 27 9 27 9 28 9 28 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL LIST OF FIGURES SVAN 956 instrument with the accelerometer and 1 3 Control push buttons of the SVAN 956 instrument essent eren eene 2 1 Display with the MARKERS after pressing ALT and lt SHIFT gt together sees 2 5 Displays with the activated markers nennen rennen eene 2 5 Time history plot with the indication of the active markers essent nennen 2 5 Top cover of the SVAN 956 instrument in 1 1 scale 2 2 2 2 6 Bottom cover of the SVAN 956 instrument in 1 1 2 6 Front panel of the SVAN 956 instrument in 1
56. HUMAN FILT IEPE CURREHT REFERENCE LEVELS LANGUAGE FLEMISH ISH FRAH AIS ESPRR L MAGYAR ITALIANO POLSKI FLEMISH PYCCEHH FRAHCAIS Language windows with all available languages a __ LANGUAGE _ M SETUP RECEHT ITEMS DEUTSCH SIGNAL GENERATOR LANGUAGE TIMER MEASUREMENT RANGE SAVE OPTIONS ESPAROL USB HOST_PORT PROFILE 1 LOAD ITALIAHO USER FILTERS MEASUREMENT SETUP DELETE FLEMISH VIBRATION UNITS DELETE ALL FRANCAIS DEFRAGMENTATION LRHGunGE SETUP _ DEUTSCH BEHERRT RE SEGNALI SALWATAG MAHUALE ENGLISH TIMER STAMPA RISULT IMPOST SALWATAG ESPANOL PORTA USB HOST STAMFA FILE CARICA DATI FILE FILTRI UTEHTE STAMPA LOGGER FILE DR FLEMISH UITERAZIOHE STAMFA FILTRI UTENTE CAHCELLA FILE FRAHCAIS STAMPA ARCHIVIO DEF RAMMENTA2 TONE Displays with the Italian version of the user interface 9 2 Jez IKCLRNGURGES 1 FLEMISH 1 FRANCAIS 1 MAGYAR 1 1 F3CCEHH TURKISH L L L oa LANGUAGE EHGL ISH ESPAROL ITALIANO FLEMISH FRRHCRIS oa LANGUAGE DEUTSCH ISH ESPAAOL ITRLIRHO FRAHCAIS oa LANGUAGE DEUTSCH EH LISH ESPRR L ITALIANO FLEMISH LANGUAGE DEUTSCH EMGLISH ITAL FLEMISH FRAHCAIS Uztawienia Generator sygnatu Budzik Host USB Filtry u ytk own Jednostki Ostrzerenia a BEHEHET M R SI BEALLiT MEASUREMEMT RAHGE 1 PROFIL 2 PROFIL 5 PROFIL EIOLD BEA
57. In order to activate IrDA SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING or EVENT RECORDING the user has to introduce a special code VALID CODE ENTER CODE ENTER CODE E 124113 5 lt 1 SH Insert SHi Delete 5H Insert PRESS ANY KEY Displays during the entering of the access code to SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING or EVENT RECORDING 9 19 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The USB host interface can be used to control the external USB memory disk USB DISK SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING EVENT RECORDING with the FAT16 or FAT32 file systems or IrDA Infrared Data Association interface USB IrDA based on the dedicated circuit STIr4200 A Notice The converter SV 55 serves as the RS 232 interface The SV 55 connection to the USB Host socket is detected and after successful detection the headphone icon is switched on The transmission using the SV 55 is possible only in the case when the instrument is not connected to a PC with the USB Device port A Notice The connection to the USB Host socket the USB disk switches off the instrument s internal flash memory All file functions and remote commands are redirected to the USB disk The internal flash memory is activated after disconnecting USB disk and the instrument After the USB DISK SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING or EVENT RECORDING selection the device connected to that socket is recognised The warning appears on the display after the connection of the unknown d
58. MODES BATTERY UNIT LABEL DISPLAY list with the DISPLAY SETUP selected 6 2 1 Setting the scale of the presentation and the display s grid DISPLAY SCALE The DISPLAY SCALE sub list enables the user to change the scale in the available modes of graphical presentation of the measurement results and switch on off the grid In order to enter this list one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed DISPLAY SCALE text of the DISPLAY SETUP sub list The DISPLAY SCALE sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY SETUP sub list after pressing the lt ESC gt the settings made there are not confirmed or the lt gt push button the settings are confirmed EE SETUP DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SETUP DIS SCALE DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE SPECTRUM TYPE SPECTRUM WIEN LOGGER IEW SPECTRUM TYPE AL URLLE LOGGER a b DISPLAY SETUP windows in VLM a in 1 1 and 1 3 OCTAVE b and in FFT c 6 2 1 1 Setting the scale of the measurement results presentation SCALE In the SCALE position two options are available LIN linear and LOG logarithmic In the case of the first one the graphical presentation and the units both are linear In the latter case the graphical presentation is given in the logarithmic scale and the measurement results are expressed in decibels the result is related to the values set in the REFERENCE LEVEL path MENU SETUP REFERENCE LEVEL It is possible to set
59. OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE mode eee 3 6 Control diagram of the INPUT list in the FFT 22 44 10000000000000 nene eene ener 3 7 Control diagram of the INPUT list in the ENVELOPING mode rennen 3 7 Control diagram of the INPUT list in the LEVEL METER 3 8 Control diagram of the DISPLAY SETUP sublist in 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of vibration 3 11 Control diagram of the DISPLAY egere petit teen bo 3 12 Control diagram of the FILE 18 2 2 2 4 000000 roueed astenie ebeud trennen nnne 3 15 Control diagram of the REPORT 3 16 Control diagram of the SETUP fhst cette ePi Ple EORR EE ERREUR DNA 3 21 BATTERY windows with different sources powering the instrument SA 15 external DC power adapter a SA 17 external battery pack b internal batteries c and USB power d 3 21 Displays with the Battery icon a and in the BATTERY window path MENU DISPLAY BATTERY b 3 22 Display with LOW BATTERY message een Den tre tret pe iiri eI 3 22 Displays with the Computer icon a and in the BATTERY window 3 22 SCREEN SETUP windows BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT activation seeseeeeeeeneeeeen nennen eene eee
60. PROFILES mode The presented result in a selected profile is changed using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons as presented below GE 288n5 COUN 351nm575 PCl 6427 mm s PEAKE 64 7mmts Pro MTUU 1i38nmz PCr HTUU 438mm HTUU 438 2 uz Profileci uz Profileci x Profileti 1750 11 15 17 3 1 1 15 Filer SAPRA jo Results 3 PROFILES mode selection of the result in a profile PEAK amp 17nmm s lt gt gt The change of the selected displayed inversely profile is done pressing the lt 5 gt and v or lt SHIFT gt and lt A gt push buttons The same result can be achieved after pressing the ALT and or ALT and lt gt gt push buttons RMS 10 2 52 9 89mms 10 2 5 9 89mmis RMS 10 2mmis SHIFT24 v SHIFT2 v RNS ne s 7 94mm Profiletci 16 58 ood RMS 7 994nmm z Profilecz3 16 58 ood Results in 3 PROFILES mode selection of the profile CHEN 7 94 minis Prafilecz B During the measurements which are indicated by the loudspeaker icon the current time from the range 1 INTEGRATION PERIOD is displayed on the right bottom clock The envelope icon indicates that results selected in the profiles path MENU INPUT PROFILE x are logged 6 5 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL RMS 1 HF iat 13 2 rm
61. REPORT OPTION FORMAT 5 with the TITLE 20JUL path MENU REPORT TITLE 20JUL looks as follows C SVANTEK SVAN 956 No 12001 2007 07 20 v6 05 6 05 2 17 09 24 TITLE 20JUL ru CE SETTINGS Device mode VIBR METER Input Accelerometer Device function LEVEL METER LEVEL METER version 6 05 Meas start date 2007 07 20 Meas start hour 17 01 00 Range zuec o samasaa z HIGH Ref level for Acc l um s2 Ref level for Vel 1 nm s 8 4 Measure trigger Logger trigger Repeat cycle Start delay Integra Calibr Calibra Calibra Calibra RMS integration factor tion by Profile Filter Detector Logger 1 1 1 05 Measurement tim 1 8 61 12 27 2 04 RMS 1 33 Prof PEAK m s2 m s2 m s2 m s2 Ref level for Dil tion time tion date tion hour ESULTS Sensitivity 2007 07 20 16 38 20 Linear 2 HP3 1 0s PEAK RMS 3 10 1 05 RMS 00 00 10 2 6 24 m s2 10 0 m s2 1 35 m s2 923mm s2 3 4 90 m s2 7 67 m s2 624mm s2 452mm s2 Example of the printed results A5 format The same result s report printed in A4 format is presented below SVAN 956 USER MANUAL
62. The START DELAY defines the delay period from the START STOP push button pressing to the start of the measurements the digital filters of the instrument analyse constantly the input signal even when the measurements are stopped This delay period can be set from 0 second to 60 seconds with 1 second step by means of the lt gt gt push buttons and with 10 seconds step with the lt gt gt push buttons pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one The ENTER push button must be pressed for the confirmation of the selection which closes simultaneously the MEASUREMENT SETUP window HERSUR SETUP START DELAY PERIOD is CYCLE Inf HERSUR SETUP START DELAY is PERIOD is CYCLE Inf HERSUR SETUP START DELAY PERIOD is CYCLE Inf 3 lt gt gt lt gt gt 2 m of of LOGGER of LOGGER LOGGER MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the START DELAY with 1 second step HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP START DELAY START DELAY INTEGR PERIOD INTEGR PERIOD CYCLE Inf lt SHIFT gt lt gt gt CYCLE Inf n L GGER MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the START DELAY with 10 seconds step A Notice The minimum delay period is equal to 0 second the CALIBRATION mode the delay period is equal to 5 seconds 5 2 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 5 1 2 Setting th
63. Timer icon flashing means that the instrument s Timer is switched on and the instrument is waiting for the set time of the measurement When the measurement was started by the Timer the icon is presented without flashing Profile 1 gt Display with Timer icon Arrows are flashing after pressing the ALT or lt SHIFT gt push button when the 2nd Fun is selected in the SHIFT MODE path MENU SETUP SHIFT MODE SHIFT 2nd FUN that means other push buttons have second or third meaning i e after pressing the lt SHIFT gt the meaning of ENTER push button is lt MENU gt after pressing the ALT the meaning of lt ESC gt push button is changed into lt PAUSE gt Profile 1 gt Display with Arrows icon A Notice The time of the measurement is displayed in minutes and seconds in the range from 1 sec to 39 minutes and 59 seconds After this limit the hours and minutes are shown i e 00 40 A Notice THE USER DYNAMICALLY MODIFIES THE DEFAULT SETUP The last set up of the instrument during the power off is stored and is available after power on 3 26 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 3 4 Selection of the working mode MODE The device can work in two modes acceleration and voltage A mode is selected by placing the special character in the line with the mode s name The position of the character can be changed using the lt A gt v push buttons After placing the character i
64. UTEH SPECTRUM UTEH EXTENDED EXTENDED AVERAGED AVERAGED J y SPECTRUM VIEW windows the MIN selection 6 2 4 Selection of the Weighting Filters TOTAL VALUES The TOTAL VALUES which is available only in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis enables the user to select the weighting filter In order to enter this window one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed TOTAL VALUES text of the DISPLAY SETUP sub list The TOTAL VALUES window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY SETUP sub list after pressing the lt 5 gt the settings made there are not confirmed or the ENTER push button the settings are confirmed a DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE SPECTRUM DIEN DISPLAY SETUP window the TOTAL VALUES text highlighted TOTAL VALUES TOTAL VALUES TOTAL VALUES TOTAL VALUES TOTAL VALUES windows the weighting filters selection in SM SVAN 956 USER MANUAL In the case of vibration mode after entering the TOTAL VALUES position on the display appears sub list with the TOTAL 1 TOTAL 2 and TOTALS3 positions The slection of the position is made by lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing ENTER for the confirmation TOTAL VALUES TOTAL VALUES TOTAL VALUES TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 TOTAL 2 AL TOTAL 3 TOTAL VALUES windows in VM the TOTALx selected In the TOTALx window for user filters S1 S2 S3 selected in the F
65. any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list DEFRAGMENTATION Unnecessary PRESS ANY Message in the case when the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is unnecessary If there are conditions to execute the DEFRAGMENTATION operation it is done and the current progress is shown on the display After the successful execution the special message is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user Any push button should be then pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and lt ALT gt one After pressing a push button the instrument returns to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list Defragmentation Clearing I I DEFRAGMENTATION Please wait Please wait finished PRESS ANY KEY Execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation The displays below illustrate the results of the FILES DEFRAGMENT after the execution the FILES FREE SPACE and TOTAL AVAILABLE become equal while the LOGGER FREE SPACE and LOGGER AVAILABLE remain unchanged 7 26 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE ei TOTAL AVAILABLE FILES FREE SPACE eS TOTAL AWAILABLE 15858268 bytes Result of the FILES DEFRAGMENTATION operation 7 6 2 Merging logger files memory LOGGER DEFRAGMENT The LOGGER DEFRAGMENT is used to join the logger files memory In orde
66. be longer than eight characters In the case when such limitation is achieved and the instrument can not change automatically the file s name the only possibility is to edit new file name A Notice The files can be overwritten the use of the same file name without any warning if the REPLACE option is switched on path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS REPLACE SAVE SAVE FILE HANE 12380CTS FILE HANE 12350CT9 12380CT9 SAUE MES 12380CT9 7 L Press ENTER to SAVE Saved Press ENTER to SAVE is used Press ESC ta SKIP Press ESC ta SKIP Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY Displays in the simplified edition of the file name saving and the saturation of that operation As it was already written the instrument attempts to save file after pressing the ENTER push button The saving is not possible in the case when the instrument is measuring the signal The special message is displayed for about 3 seconds in this case and the instrument returns to the SAVE window SAVE LE Saab TO FI HERSUREHEHT SHE HEST PROGRESS Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press UP to EDIT Displays after the attempt to perform unavailable saving operation and the return to the SAVE NEXT The presented below message is displayed after trying to execute the save operation in the case when no measurements were performed and there are no results to be saved
67. buttons in the case when the measurements are not performed and the DIRECT SAVE is not active 1 and active V a SAVE OPTIO SAVE RAM FILE FILE 12580073 REFLACE SAUE NEXT E 2 12380CT9 AUTO SAVE Src ENTER gt Saved D K Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY SAVE RRM FILE REPLACE _ 12380CT9 DIRECT SAUE s Saved SAUE MAX SPECT SAVE MIH SPECT PRESS ANY KEW Exemplary executions of the software with the DIRECT SAVE active 7 2 5 Saving maximum values in the spectrum SAVE MAX SPECT The SAVE MAX SPECT enables the user to save the highest values of the INSTANTENEOUS spectra calculated with 100 milliseconds time step in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis which occured during the INTEGR PERIOD set in the INPUT list path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP INTEGR PERIOD The activation or deactivation of the SAVE MAX SPECT is done by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button the activation is confirmed The SAVE OPTION sub list is closed ignoring all settings made in it after pressing the lt ESC gt push button SVAN 956 USER MANUAL SAUE DPTID SAUE DPTID RAM FILE RAM FILE REPLACE REPLACE AUTO SRUE H AUTO SRUE DIRECT SRUE DIRECT SAVE SAVE MAS SPECT SAVE MAS SPECT SAUE SPECT SAUE SPECT SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the SA
68. by the user as it appears for the short time Ll SAVE SETUP FILE FILE SAVE Press ENTER to SAUE Saving Saved Press ESC to SKIF Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY View of all displays during and after the execution of the SAVE operation As it was already written it is not possible to store the data in the file which already exists when the REPLACE is not active path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS REPLACE The presented below sequence of displays illustrates the situation when during the name edition process the user selected the name that was used before but this time the REPLACE is active The setup file is overwritten the instrument displays a special message and waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the lt ALT gt one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list LEU m Press ENTER to SAUE Saved D ee Press ESC to SKIF DIRECT SAVE Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY SAVE MAS SPECT id SAVE SETUP oa SAVE OPTIONS FILE HAME LEU_ SAVE SETUP FILE HAME LEU Press ENTER to SRUE LEU Saved Press ESC to SKIF Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY Displays after the attempt to overwrite a file if the REPLACE is active 7 10 Loading the files with the setup settings LOAD S
69. dB step or 10 dB steps from 1 00 mm s to 10 0 km s 24 dB to 136 dB range using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons or lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt L LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER 1 LEVEL i 1 LEUEL TRIGGER LEVEL s RMSCLID s RMSCID SOURCE H PASI LEVEL a Bini i B irati 5 POST LEUEL H LEUEL RMSCIA RMSCID LELEL 22 LEUEL 25 1 mi EVEL a FP BR PR Ar PRE B B anaes HB Anges LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection 1 dB step up cont A Notice The LEVEL value of the triggering signal in logger refers to the instantaneous value of the RMS result from the first profile calculated during the period depending on selected DETECTOR path MENU INPUT PROFILE 1 DETECTOR LOGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER LEVEL lt gt gt lt SHIFT gt SOURCE 1 a G aa B BmBns Ll LOGGER TRIGGER LEWEL L GGER TEIGGER SOURCE lt gt gt lt SHIFT gt LEUEL B Fire LEUEL PRE B Bm Bs POST B 5 5 16 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL LOGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER LEVEL TRIGGER 1 LEWEL LOGGER TRIGGER LEVEL lt gt gt lt SHIFT gt B amos B anges CRETA lt gt gt lt SHIFT gt Fire first _LOGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER LEWEL lt gt gt lt SHIFT
70. defragmentation path MENU FILE DEFRAGMENTATION LOGGER DEFRAGMENT a a a LOGGER 15405KB LOGGER 15405KB LOGGER 15405KB gt xu PC12 PERK MAS RMS PC23 PERK RMS 2 15405 PCSO MRE MIH z 15485 7 AVAILABLE 15457 KB Displays the LOGGER VIEW sub list the scrolling of the file to be seen The display of the instrument after entering the LOGGER VIEW looks as on the figure below in the case when the logger s file does not exist there was no measurement or the measurements were performed but with the settings LOGGER Off path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP L1 LOGGER 15488kB FILE H B Display in the LOGGER VIEW sub list in the case when the files do not exist The contents of the selected logger s file is displayed after pressing the ENTER push button The cursor position is changed after pressing the lt gt gt push buttons The left end of the graphical presentation is reached immediately after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and while the right end after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons The type of the registered result the number of the profile the result is coming from the related time from the beginning of the registration the value with the units and the indicator of the filter are presented in the NORMAL and EXTENDED logger s view mode on the right side of the display Disp
71. for almost all results and 96 only for OVL is given in the second line The profile the results are coming from is visible in the bottom of the display Profile 1 Profile 2 or Profile 3 The vertical line showing the value of the result in the analogue like form together with the scale is presented at the left side of the display The real time clock is visible in the bottom right corner of the display The selection of the result is made pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons RMS 2 2 wi 2 p ET 1 50 7 UU Profileci3 x Profileci3 x Profileci3 x 00 91 00 31 00 31 BENE rm PEAK 2 45 2 85 WMA 2 85 F1 13 1158 ley 3 41 Profileci gt b Profileci gt E Profileci gt 1G d Measurement results in VM presented in one profile mode The profile is changed after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt A gt or lt SHIFT gt and v push buttons The same result can be achieved after pressing the lt ALT gt and lt lt gt or ALT and lt gt gt push buttons There is also possible to present differently the measurement data in one profile after pressing the ALT and or ALT and v push buttons In this case the result is displayed with the biggest possible fonts The name of the result together with the units is given in the bottom line The current result from a selected profile is changed after pressing the lt gt gt or the
72. gt This push button closes the control lists sub lists or windows It acts in opposite to the lt ENTER gt push button When the window is closed pressing the lt ESC gt push button any changes made in it are ignored in almost all cases This push button pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt enters the CALIBRATION sub list in which the user can enter one of the available sub lists BY SENSITIVITY BY MEASUREMENT LAST CALIBRATION and TEDS lt PAUSE gt This push button enables one to break the measurement process temporarily The subsequent pressing of the lt PAUSE gt push button deletes the measurement results from the last one second The indicator of the measurement time is counted down after each pressing and the measurement result from the previous second appears on the display Up to fifteen last seconds of the measurement can be cancelled in this way lt lt gt lt gt gt These push buttons enable one in particular to e select the options in an active position in the horizontal direction e g filter HP1 HP3 HP10 Integration period 1s 2s 3s etc e select the measurement result to be displayed e g RMS OVL PEAK etc in one profile and 3 PROFILES modes of result s presentation e control the cursor in LOGGER and SPECTRUM mode of result s presentation e select the position of the character in the text edition i e in the FILE NAME menu e switch on off the BACKLIGHT of
73. gt 200 B MEES B LOGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER LEVEL SOURCE F RMS i3 lt gt gt lt 5 gt TRIGGER 1 LEVEL Bk mst mmm B Pirate B LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection 10 dB step up 5 4 2 4 Selection of the number of the results to be saved in the logger before the fulfilment of the triggering condition PRE In the PRE line the number of the results registered in the logger s file before the fulfilment of the triggering condition can be set This number is within the limits 0 50 and can be set with the step equal to one using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons or with the step equal to 10 using the lt lt gt lt gt gt with lt 5 gt LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER LEVEL TRIGGER s LEVEL LEVEL RMSCID RNSC1 gt 5 lt 19 MEASUR SETUP START DELAY FERIUD L GGER STEP LOGGER 105115 TRIGGER windows with the selection Time period of the measurements which are saved in the logger before the fulfilment of the triggering condition can be calculated multiplying the value set in the PRE by the value set in the LOGGER STEP path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP The result of the calculation is presented in the same line at the right side of the display oa HERSUR SETUP LOGGER TRIGGER HERSUR SETUP LOGGER TRIG
74. in the case of the logger Before the defragmentation the FILES FREE SPACE and TOTAL AVAILABLE characterizing the result memory path MENU FILE FREE SPACE usually differ between each other After this operation these two parts are equal The same situation is in the case of the LOGGER FREE SPACE and TOTAL AVAILABLE characterizing the logger file In order to enter the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list the user has to select the DEFRAGMENTATION text in the FILE list using the A v lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER SAVE SETUP DEFRAGMENTATION text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE list A Notice The DEFRAGMENTATION must not be broken the user should never press lt 5 gt any other push button during the DEFRAGMENTATION process 7 6 1 Merging result and setup files memory FILES DEFRAGMENTATION The FILES DEFRAGMENT is used to join the result and setup files memory In order to select this the user has to display inversely the FILES DEFRAGMENT text in the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list using the lt A gt or lt lt gt push button DEFRAGMENTATION FILES DEFRAGMENT LOGGER DEFRAGMENT FILES DEFRAGMENT selected to the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation The DEFRAGMENTATION sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button In order to continue the execution of the function one has to press th
75. informs the user about the available averaging during FFT analysis LINEAR FILTER position available types of the digital weighting filter used during FFT analysis BAND position available values of the bands of the FFT analysis 87 5Hz 175Hz 350Hz 700Hz 1 4kHz 2 8kHz 5 6kHz 11 2kHz 22 4kHz WINDOW position it informs the user about the available coefficients of time window HANNING RECTANGLE FLAT TOP KAISER BESSEL 3 5 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 3 6 LINES available values 480 960 1920 LOGGER available values N gt RPM sub list this sub list appears on the display after activation of RPM MEASUREMENT option in SETUP list RPM it enables the user to switch on the rotation measurement option available or N PULSE ROT it enables the user to select the number of pulses rotations available values 1 2 360 UNIT available values commonly used RPM revolutions per minute or RPS revolutions per second gt ENVELOPING sub list this sub list appears on the display in the case of the ENVELOPING mode FILTER position available values of the filter in ENVELOPING mode 800Hz 20kHz BAND position available values of the band of the ENVELOPING mode 22Hz 22 4kHz LINES available values 480 960 1920 gt TRIGGER SETUP sub list in LEVEL METER mode path MENU FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION LEVEL METER MEASURE TRIGGER it enables the user to switch on or off the tri
76. lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed together For saving the power of the battery in the normal day light operation it is recommended to keep the backlight off The user can set the BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT path MENU DISPLAY SCREEN SETUP BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT which will cause the self made backlight switching off in the case when the keyboard is not used during the last 30 seconds If it happened the first pressing of any push button switches the backlight on oa ao SCREEN SETUP SCREEN SETUP CONTRAST CONTRAST BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT SCREEN SETUP windows BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT activation 3 3 Initial setup of the instrument The instrument passes the self test after switching on in this time the producer and the name of the instrument is displayed on the display and then it enters the vibration mode The default display mode for result s presentation is one profile Please wait d7s 8 gt to skip Displays after switching on the instrument To start the measurements the user has to press the lt START STOP gt push button The result of the measurement is displayed with the unit of the measurement in so called one profile mode On the left side of the display the analogue like indicator is presented On the bottom of the display there is a profile from which comes the measurement Profile 1 Profile 2 or Profile 3 On the top of the display under th
77. lt SHIFT gt and lt ALT gt one and after pressing a push button it returns to the DELETE sub list E B gt lt ENTER gt gt 81 08111 gt ANY PUSH BUTTON gt 15 MAX MIN RMS lt 25 MIN RMS PoSo PEAK RMS PRESS ANY DELETE RESULT FILES gt ENTER gt LOGGER FILES SETUP FILES 3 MIN RMS Execution of the LOGGER FILES deletion After the execution of the logger files deletion from the memory usually the logger free space rests the same as before the deletion but the total logger available memory is increased It is because erased file was somewhere in the file s space The file is no longer accessible but the recuperated memory is still unused for the next saving This memory becomes available after the defragmentation process path 7 18 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL MENU FILE DEFRAGMENTATION LOGGER DEFRAGMENT in which all files are moved to the continuous space It can be illustrated on the figures below by erasing from the memory 2 kB long logger file named amp LOG107 The presented there FREE SPACE window comes from the FILE list DELETE LOS FILE treme E gt amp LoGio07 DB SIZE 2 KB gt ENTER gt Deleted 0 15 MIN RMS zere lt 25 RMS Pegi MIH PRESS ANY KEY a a a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE
78. mm rofile Frofilecl Displays during the measurement performed in VM with the active LOGGER an envelope icon The results can be saved using SAVE SAVE NEXT or AUTO SAVE functions after the end of the measurements caused by the any reason remote control pressed STOP push button or fulfilment of the INTEGR PERIOD REP CYCLE condition It is not possible to save the results during the execution of the measurements 6 1 1 Switching on off spectrum view SPECTRUM The SPECTRUM position is accesible only in 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT function path MENU FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION The possibility of the measurement results presentation in SPECTRUM can be switched on or off placing or replacing the special character in the displayed inversely line with the SPECTRUM text by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the ENTER push button This confirmation closes also the DISPLAY MODES sub list The sub list can be also closed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the settings made there are ignored oa DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY MODES SPECTRUM SPECTRUM 3 PROFILES 3 PROFILES LOGGER LOGGER FILE IMFO FILE IMFO Displays in SPECTRUM mode for 1 1 OCTAVE a 1 3 OCTAVE b and FFT c 6 1 2 Switching on off three profiles view 3 PROFILES 6 4 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The possibility of the measurement results presentation i
79. position 9 27 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Ll HARNINGS HARNINGS RESULTS HOT SAVED RESULTS HOT SAVED RA USB DISK FREE SF 21 USE DISK FREE SF LJ FREE SPACE 2 FREE SPACE 32MB WARNINGS windows RESULTS NOT SAVED selected When the position is set to be active the special warning can be displayed after pressing the START STOP push button It will be happened in a case when the result of the previous measurement was not saved in a file of the instrument LAS No o A T RESULTS LAST RESULTS LAST RESULTS T SAVED NOT SAVED NOT SAVED n 1 tinue Continue Continue SAVE NEXT ww Displays with LAST RESULTS NOT SAVE warning The question Continue appears with the warning message The default value of the CONTINUE position is SAVE NEXT After pressing the lt ENTER gt push button the instrument saves last results with the name number increased by one Using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons one can change the value of the CONTINUE position to YES or NO If YES is chosen to confirm the change the lt ENTER gt should be pressed the instrument returns to the active mode of result presentation starting the new measurement process If NO is chosen to confirm the change the ENTER should be pressed the instrument returns to the active mode of measurement result s presentation without starting the new measurement process 9 18 2 Checking free space on th
80. powered from the external power supplier from the external battery pack from four AA standard or AA rechargeable batteries or from the USB interface when its USB Device Socket is connected by means of the cable to a PC The view presented on the display in each case is different The current battery voltage is displayed together with its approximate state in the graphical form 6 18 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL n m n BATTERY BATTERY BATTERY EXTERNAL POWER EXTERNAL POWER USB POHER 12 1 9 29 5 0u BATTERY windows for different sources powering the instrument 6 6 Checking specification of the instrument UNIT LABEL The UNIT LABEL enables the user to check the type of the instrument its serial number the current software versions installed in it and the standards which the instrument fulfils In order to enter the list one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed UNIT LABEL text of the DISPLAY list The UNIT LABEL sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY list after pressing the lt ESC gt or the ENTER push button DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY list the UNIT LABEL text highlighted After pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt or lt A gt v push buttons the displayed text is scrolled on the display and the user can check the number of the standard fulfilled by the instrument and the current software version The window is closed and the instrument returns to t
81. printing when there is no transfer and no data b sss 8 6 REPORT windows with the PRINT FILE selected eese eene eene nennen nennen nenne 8 6 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 8 7 Display in the REPORT list the PRINT FILE position when no files were saved sss 8 7 Displays during the selection of the file to be printed sse enne eene 8 7 Display during the execution of the PRINT FILE operation nennen eee 8 7 Display during the file sending out when there is no data transfer nene 8 7 Example of the printed file from the VIBRATION LEVEL METER mode format A5 2 2 22 2 2 8 8 REPORT windows with the PRINT LOGGER nennen 8 9 PRINT LOGGER window opened Function not available 8 9 REPORT windows with the PRINT USER FILTERS selected essere nre 8 9 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 8 9 PRINT USER FILTERS windows the user filter 8 9 Display the REPORT list the execution of the PRINT USER FILTERS eene 8 10 Example of the printed coefficients of the user filter S1 f
82. push buttons The profile the results are coming from is changed after pressing the lt 5 gt and or lt SHIFT gt and v but the profile s number is not visible on the display The same result can be achieved after pressing the ALT and lt lt gt or ALT and lt gt gt push buttons When the statistics level Lxx is presented the another levels from the set of ten values are available after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt or lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons The presentation mode is changed to 3 PROFILES and LOGGER or FILE INFO if all of them are currently available after pressing the or v push buttons Measurement results in VM and unknow profile presented with the biggest fonts in one profile mode 6 3 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL When the measurements are performed what is indicated on the display by the loudspeaker icon the clock displayed in the right bottom shows the current second of the measurement The value presented there belongs to the range 1 INTEGRATION PERIOD The envelope icon visible above and below indicates that the selected results from the profiles path MENU INPUT PROFILE x are logged Low Low ao d RMS 2 85 unu 2 8z 2 85 3 76 we 1 50 2 00 Profileci3 X Frafileci Profileci3 00 01 1 00 01 00 01 d 2 45 2 05 MAX 2 05 143 1158 1347 10 Profilecia Profilecia rofile
83. send them to a PC using SvanPC software and USB interface PRINT CATALOGUE that enables the user to print out the catalogue of the files OPTIONS that enables the user to determine the options of the report m PRIMT RESULTS PRIHT RESULTS RINT PRIHT RIHT FILE L GGER PRIHT LOGGER PRIHT USER FILTERS PRINT USER FILTERS PRINT CATALOGUE PRINT CATALOGUE REPORT list A Notice All reports are printed in the character format using the ASCII set 8 2 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 8 1 Edition of the user s text to be added to the reports TITLE The TITLE enables the user to edit the text added to the file and to the report to be printed This operation is performed in the same way as it was described in the case of the FILE NAME window In order to enter the position the user has to select the TITLE text in the REPORT list using the lt A gt lt lt gt or A lt lt gt with lt SHIFT gt push buttons and press the ENTER one REPORT PRIHT RESULTS PRINT CATALOGUE REPORT windows with the TITLE selected The text edition is made using the A v lt lt gt lt gt gt lt SHIFT gt push buttons The lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons are used for changing the position of the edited character The number counted from the beginning of the text of the edited character is displayed in the first line of the display in the brackets The text is limited
84. spectrum if 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT e The size of the remaining free memory for logger files FREE e The size of the available memory for logger file AVAILABLE LOGGER 15459KEB3 LOGGER 15459KEB3 FILE HD FILE 4 5743 FILE 0647 FILE 0647 RECORDS 189 RECORDS 189 MAX RMSI PCS2 PEHE MAX RMS FREE 15459 KB PosasPEARK MAS a AVAILABLE 15459 Displays in the LOGGER VIEW sub list The change of the number of the logger s file is done by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons LOGGER C1i5459KB3 1 45 L B FILE 810845 RECORDS 79 PC13 PERK MAS RHS Pe2o PEAK MAs RMS 52 RP 154523KB LOGGER 15452KB 4 47 amp LOG45 22 5 5 Prio PEAK MAX RMS PPP Cio PEAK MAS RMS FREE 15459 KB Po2osPEAK MAK RMS RMS AVAILABLE 15459 KB PoSa PEAK 52 4 6 15 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Displays the LOGGER VIEW sub list the selection of the file to be seen The size of the FREE memory for logger files is equal to the size of the AVAILABLE memory for logger file in the case when the logger files were not deleted from the memory If it has happened the FREE memory is always smaller than AVAILABLE In order to increase the free memory space and achieve the available one the user has to perform the
85. standard is available 5 6 2 Selecting the band during the 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis BAND The BAND position enables the user to select the band in which the 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis of the signal has to be performed In 956 instrument only FULL band is available The selection of this parameter is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the change made in the line requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The SPECTRUM window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt 5 gt push button 5 6 3 Activation of logger for 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis results LOGGER The RMS result from 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis can be saved in the logger s file of the instrument or on the USB memory stick The activation is made by placing a special character in the LOGGER position The activation is possible when the LOGGER functionality is switched on in the MEASUREMENT SETUP window path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LOGGER If the LOGGER functionality is switched off the position is not accessible The confirmation of the change made in the position requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The SPECTRUM window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt 5 gt push button a SPECTRUM SPECTRUM SPECTRUM window
86. tachometer 1 6 Current list of SVAN 956 options and accessories The current list of the SVAN 956 options and accessories are presented below SVAN956 SVAN956_WA SVAN956_1 SVAN956_1WA SV 956_3 SV 956_8 SV 956_9 SV 956_11 SV 956_15 SV 956_16 SV 55 Vibration Meter amp FFT Analyser SVAN 956 without accelerometer and SC 27 cable SVAN 956 including 1 1 amp 1 3 octave SVAN 956_WA including 1 1 amp 1 3 oct 1 1 amp 1 3 octave analysis option Rotation measurement option including Laser Tachometer Human Vibration filters option Enveloping analysis option Time domain signal recording option User programmable second order band pass filters RS232 interface option for the SVAN 95x except SVAN 954 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL SV 56 SV 3185D SC 27 SC 59 SA 18 SA 27 3185D SA 45 SA 46 SA 47 SA 48 IrDA interface option for the SVAN 95x except SVAN 954 100 mV g TNC top connector 1 4 28 mounting hole general purpose accelerometer TNC plug to TNC plug coil cable 2 m LEMO 2 pin plug to 2 x BNC sockets Carrying bag for SVAN 95x and accessories leather Mounting magnet for the accelerometer Carrying case for SVAN 95x and accessories waterproof Carrying belt bag for SVAN 95x leather Carrying bag for SVAN 95x and accessories fabric material Carrying case for SVAN 958 and accessories waterproof by PROTECTOR 2 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL MANUAL CONTROL OF THE INSTRUMENT The control of t
87. the ENTER one L1 CALIBRATION LAST CALIBRATION CALIBRATION z6 MAR zoar 13 BY 26 2B BS 25 56 13 15 Ba 43 85 DEC 28086 14 257 zur 13 26 z4 WOW Fee 14 56 a Displays in the CALIBRATION window the LAST CALIBRATION text selected a the LAST CALIBRATION window opened with ten calibration records b In order to review the calibration record the user has to select the required line in the LAST CALIBRATION window using the lt A gt v push buttons and press the ENTER one The opened window contains the date and time of the performed calibration measurement the way the calibration was done BY MEASUREMENT or BY SENSITIVITY the desired calibration level CAL LEVEL in the case of the measurements and the obtained calibration factor CAL FACTOR CALIBRATION LAST CALIBRATION 26 MAR 2007 08 09 42 gt lt ENTER gt gt SENSITIUIT CAL FACTOR 28 G88dB 2007 1 B2 26 Displays with the LAST CALIBRATION record In the case when the calibration measurements were not performed the LAST CALIBRATION window does not contain any record The contents of this window is cleared after the CLEAR SETUP operation LAST CALIBRATION Ho calibration records Display with the empty LAST CALIBRATION window 4 3 4 Automatic reading of a vibration transducer parameters TEDS The TEDS Transducer Electronic Data Sheet function enables automatic reading by the
88. the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the current display The LOGGER TRIGGER window is closed ignoring any changes made after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button 5 4 2 1 Switching the logger triggering on and off TRIGGER The logger triggering of the measurements TRIGGER can be switched off using the push button or lt lt gt with lt SHIFT gt The triggering is switched on if the LEVEL or LEVEL mode is selected using the lt gt gt push button or lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt oa LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER gt lt y gt gt LEUEL POST 5 15 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL LOGGER SETUP windows trigger mode selection 5 4 2 2 Selection of the triggering signal in logger SOURCE It is assumed that only one measured result can be used as a source of the triggering signal in the logger namely the output signal from the RMS detector coming from the first profile which is denoted here as RMS 1 This position does not become active it is not displayed inversely and the text stated here remains unchanged After pressing the v push button the SOURCE line is skipped LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER 1 LEWEL LEUEL POST LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the not active SOURCE signal line 5 4 2 3 Setting the level of the triggering signal in the logger LEVEL The Jevel of the triggering signal in logger LEVEL can be set in 1
89. the lt ESC gt push button 9 22 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL D D REAL TIME FILT REAL TIME FILT REAL TIME FILT Ri REAL TIME FILTERS windows the filter selection In Rx R1 R2 R3 window there are three positions TYPE LFC 3dB HFC 3dB The selection of the position is made by means of lt A gt v push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press ENTER push button In the TYPE position there are three options HIGHPASS BANDPASS and LOWPASS denoting the type of the digital filter which has to be designed and implemented All mentioned above filters high pass band pass and low pass are the second order which means that the slope is equal to 12 dB octave The selection of the option is made with lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation is made after pressing ENTER push button The return to the REAL TIME FILTERS list ignoring any changes made in the sub list is made after pressing the lt 5 gt push button LOWPASS TYPE i TYPE LFECZdB 18 oi LFCC3dB 0 5 Hz HFCC3dB2 18 88 kHz HFCtSdB2 18 88 kHz filter windows the TYPE selection In the case of a low pass filter the user has to determine the HFC 3dB parameter which denotes the HFC High Frequency Corner of the Rx filter at which the amplitude of the input signal is attenuated two times The available values are from 100 Hz to 10 0 kHz The selection of the required value is made with lt lt
90. the BAUD RATE sess eee 9 13 RS232 window the setting of the TIME OUT with 1 second nennen 9 13 RS232 window the setting of the TIME OUT with 10 seconds 9 13 SETUP list RTC text highlighted displayed inversely eese 9 13 RTC windows with the different parameters to be 9 14 SETUP list the SHIFT MODE text highlighted displayed inversely see 9 14 SHIFT MODE windows the available SHIFT settings sese eene enne nenne 9 15 SHIFT MODE windows the available ST SP settings nn nennen nennen ener 9 15 SETUP list the SIGNAL GENERATOR selected highlighted inversely eee 9 15 Display in the opened SIGNAL GENERATOR window 9 15 SETUP list the TIMER text highlighted displayed inversely eese 9 16 TIMER windows the mode selection ccccsscsccccecssssssececececsesssaececececeeseaececececeesesesesececeeseaaeseeeeeceesenssaeseeeeseeenees 9 16 TIMER windows setting day of the instrument s switch on nennen 9 17 TIMER windows setting hour and minute of the instrument s 9 17 TIMER windows setting REPETITION parameter eren 9 18 Exemplary setting
91. the required option using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the selection is made by pressing the ENTER push button The return without taking into account any change is made after pressing the lt 5 gt push button oa oa DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE LG DVMHMIC S dB BRID 4 200 1x AUTOSCALE v BRID 4 AUTOSCALE v RHS 1 RHS 1 531 mm s 114 b i 1 19 5 1 19 b L Measurement results presented in linear mm s a and logarithmic dB b scale 6 2 1 2 Scaling the vertical axis of the graphical mode presentation DYNAMIC The DYNAMIC position appears on the display when logarithmic LOG scale is selected in SCALE position It enables the user to select the proper scaling of the graphical mode presentation In the case of the vertical axis one can obtain the double four times and eight times expansion as the default the vertical axis corresponds to 80 dB after expansion it corresponds to 40 dB 20 dB and 10 dB respectively using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER for the confirmation 6 8 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE LOG SCALE LOG LOG LOG DYNAMIC ECCE GTC x x 4 200M GRID EI GRID 11 GRID L GRID 1 AUTOSCALE AUTOSCALE w J Displays with the results stored in the logger pr
92. them the separate charger is required In this case using the best NiMH type the operation time can be increased up to 16 h 4 8 V 2 6 Ah e USB interface 500 mA HUB The BATTERY window path MENU DISPLAY BATTERY looks differently depending on the current powering source a BATTERY a a BATTERY BATTERY EXTERNAL POHER EXTERNAL POWER USB POWER 12 1u 9 2U 5 u a b BATTERY windows with different sources powering the instrument SA 15 external DC power adapter SA 17A external battery pack b internal batteries c and USB power d 3 21 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL For the external powering the SA 15 adapter should be connected to the Power socket located on the bottom cover of the instrument When the instrument is powered from the external power supply or by the USB interface the red diode on the right corner of the front panel bottom of the device switches on In the case of SA 15 the EXTERNAL POWER message appears in the BATTERY window path MENU DISPLAY BATTERY When the instrument is powered from batteries the Battery icon is presented on the top of the display When voltage of the batteries is too low the icon is flashing and during attempt of switching on the LOW BATTERY message occurs on the display for 2 seconds and the instrument switches off by itself To change the batteries the user has to e switch off the instrument take off the black bottom cover of the instrument e unscrew batt
93. to 128 characters a TITLE C361 YAT a TITLE C351 HVRT a TITLE 181 TITLE 1 E AIRPORT Hotel S5H Delete SH Insert Delete 5H Insert S5Hs Delete SH gt Insert rbelete Insert Displays in the text edition of the report s header The lt A gt v push buttons are used for the selection of the ASCII characters Digits small and big letters as well as special characters all together 91 are available cf the view of the displays below Small and big letters are placed one after another Pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt push buttons causes that the highlighted character is erased from the text DEL function Pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt causes that the whole text is shifted one position to the right INSERT function The window is closed and the instrument returns to the REPORT list after pressing the ENTER or lt ESC gt push button In the first case the edited text is saved and will be added to the printed reports In the latter case newly introduced text or the amendments made in the old one are ignored TITLE 611 aPpiaRr Ss TEL du S W oa oa TITLE 211 TITLE r411 6123456789 RaBbCcDdES eFf GeHhI iJijKkL lhmhHnos S5H Delete 5H Insert 5H Delete 5H Insert S5Hz Delete SH gt Irsert Displays with all available characters a TITLE 911 Ek a TITLE 811 YZZ t8 nU 11 a S5H Dele
94. 0 s 58 55 20 UD args Himes 5 155 20 REP CYCLE LOGGER LOGGER STEP LOGGER amp LOG23 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the POST selection Time period of the measurements which are saved in the logger after the fulfilment of the triggering condition can be calculated multiplying the value set in the POST by the value set in the LOGGER STEP path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP The result of the calculation is presented in the same line at the right side of the display HERSUR SETUP LOGGER TRIGGER MERSUR SETUP LOGGER TRIGGER _ START DELAY def LEUEL START DELAY 1 4 LEVEL IHTEGR PERIOD RMECIO i REP CYCLE Inf 1H H mis LOGGER 158 33m2 s LOGGER STEP 1330208 LOGGER 06525 HERSUR SETUP START DELAY IMTEGE PERIOD LOGGER 0625 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the POST selection for different LOGGER STEPS MEASUR SETUP LOGGER TRIGGER MEASUR SETUP LOGGER TRIGGER START DELAY ds TRIGGER LEVEL START DELAY ish TRIGGER LEVEL IHTEGR PERIOD SOURCE z RMSeL gt REP CYCLE 112 6 mist LOGGER s 19 8 8385 L GGER STEP 8 4685 SETUP _ LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER START DELAY 1 4 TRIGGER LEVEL TRIGGER LEVEL IHTEBR PERIOD RMSCID REP CYCLE Inf 212 6 m s d 12 6 mse LOGGER 20 G 160s 28 1 LOGGER STEP 3 100
95. 0 1 dB difference The reasons for unstable results are as follows e the calibrator is not properly attached to the instrument e there are external disturbances e the calibrator or the measurement channel the accelerometer or the instrument itself are damaged A Note During the calibration period external disturbances vibrations or acoustic noise should not exceed 100 5 Press the lt ENTER gt push button in order to accept the measurement result The calibration factor is calculated stored and displayed cf Fig below for logarithmic and linear scale path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE SCALE after pressing the ENTER push button MEASUREMENT BY MEASUREMENT CHL LEUEL gt lt ENTER gt gt EAL LEVEL BY MEASUREMENT BY MEASUREMENT CAL RESULT Ms mise 4 5 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Displays after pressing the ENTER push button after calculation of the calibration factor value A Note The calibration factor is always added to the measurement results the LEVEL METER mode and to those coming from the frequency analysis 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT and ENVELOPING 4 3 3 History of the calibration LAST CALIBRATION In order to enter the LAST CALIBRATION window in which up to last ten calibration records are remembered the user has to select the proper text in the CALIBRATION window using the A v push buttons and press
96. 000000 6 13 TOTAL x windows the weighting filters selection in 0022 0 eene nennen 6 13 TOTALx windows the 6 13 TOTALx windows CALIBRATION FACTOR setfing 6 14 DISPLAY SETUP windows the LOGGER VIEW text highlighted esee 6 14 LOGGER VIEW windows with the possible values of the VIEW 6 14 Displays with the possible values of the VIEW parameter nre 6 14 LOGGER VIEW windows with the possible values of the TIME parameter eee 6 14 Displays with the possible values of the TIME parameter nennen nennen 6 15 DISPLAY list the LOGGER VIEW text highlighted 6 15 Dbisplaysan th LOGGER VIEW sub hst eterni wtih awa E beatin cnet 6 15 Displays the LOGGER VIEW sub list the selection of the file to be seen sss 6 16 Displays in the LOGGER VIEW sub list the scrolling of the file to be seen sss 6 16 Display in the LOGGER VIEW sub list in the case when the files do not eXxiIst aa 6 16 Displays with the selected logger s file the change of the cursor position sse 6 16 Display with the selected logger file the scrolling to the left 6 16 Displays with the selected logger s file the change of the axis relation
97. 1 1 TIME2 TIME2 TIMES TIMES 4 TIMER windows setting day of instrument s switch on 9 14 3 Setting hour of the instrument s switch on START HOUR The START HOUR determines hour of the measurement start The required hour can be selected pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons when the START HOUR text is displayed inversely in the TIMER sub list In order to set minutes one has to enter their position pressing the lt A gt v pushbuttons and then pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons to select the proper value The selected value has to be confirmed by pressing the ENTER push button which causes the simultaneous return to the SETUP list All settings are ignored after the return to the SETUP list by pressing the ESC push button TIMER TIMER TIMER MODE SINGLE MODE SINGLE MODE SINGLE STA DAY Bi START DAY Hi FEB START DAY Hi FEB START HOUR START HOUR B1 FEJ START HOUR SA TIMER MODE REGULAR MODE REGULAR MODE REGULAR START DAY 83 MAR START DAY 83 MAR START DAY 83 MAR START HOUR 5 START HOUR 5 START HOUR REPETITION 12 08 REPETITION 12 08 REPETITION 12 06 TIMER windows setting hour and minute of the instrument s switch on 9 14 4 Selecting the start hours for four irregular automatic measurements The TIMEX TIME1 TI
98. 2086 69 OCT 2086 2806 modify press To modify press To modify press To modify press or gt change or gt change or amp change or gt change 11 16 38 1 15 11 15 58 11 17 83 SoM 20105 TAGE Ba OCT OCT HE n modify press n modify press o modify press modify press or gt change or gt change or gt change or gt change RTC windows with the different parameters to be set A Notice The new value of a parameter is confirmed after each pressing of the lt lt gt or lt gt gt together with the lt SHIFT gt push buttons new value is selected without any confirmation from the lt gt push button The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the lt gt or lt ESC gt push button 9 12 Selection of few push buttons mode SHIFT MODE The SHIFT MODE enables the user to programme the operation mode of the lt SHIFT gt lt ALT gt and START STOP push buttons In order to enter the position the user has to select the SHIFT MODE text in the SETUP list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one The selection of a parameter in both positions is done by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and confirmed by the ENTER one Any changes made in the window are not
99. 232 BAUD RATE it enables the user to set the baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 TIME OUT it enables the user to set the time out 1 s 60 s RTC RTC it enables the user to set the internal real time clock and date of the instrument SHIFT MODE SHIFT available modes of the lt SHIFT gt push button Shift or 2nd Fun ST SP available modes of the START STOP push button Normal or Inverse SIGNAL GENERATOR function under development Function not available message appears on the display SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 3 18 TIMER sub list it enables the user to set time of the self switching on of the instrument specifies the mode of automatic power on available values e SINGLE START DAY specifies the date of automatic power on START HOUR specifies the time of automatic power on e REGULAR START DAY specifies the date of automatic power on START HOUR specifies the time of automatic power on REPETITION specifies time after which next automatic measurement will be executed e IRREGULAR START DAY specifies the date of automatic power on TIMEx enables the user to specify four times of automatic measurements gt USB HOST PORT it enables the user to choose with proper functionality of USB HOST socket for connection of the instrument to RS232 USB IRDA USB DISK SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING EVENT RECORDING gt USER FILTERS it enables the
100. 3 23 Displays after switching on the 1 3 23 Displays in one profile a and 3 PROFILES display mode b with the VLM measurement results 3 23 Displays in 3 PROFILES display mode with the measurements results which are from LEVEL METER mode continuous lines b and with the results which are not from the LEVEL METER dotted lines 3 24 Display with all available IC9BS RI a orent eria ee ee EEE Esaa E IEEE nete nennen 3 24 Display With Paper sheet a uns hunaqpa e Den e ETES 3 24 Display with Battery ette t Roi tte eR E e prodiit Se qh RH REM o mee EM 3 25 Display with Comp ter co sasana entren nete trennen 3 25 Display with Antenna Tree ICONS eei e ER E eee 3 25 Display with Loudspeaker 160n i eto onde edat eie eite DID pe ineo 3 25 Display with Headphone petri ene eere ER ER ere eH pet ropes en 3 25 Display with Envelope 1 eee terere i treten tero Hee Ine EUR 3 26 Display with nete OUO uere e tei eee s 3 26 Display With Timer 10D rote eto ere DERE Br DU FE Freie iei REDE HO ERR RET BEER 3 26 Display with Arrows ICO ener nie e afe erae hit ree te PER dE REP 3 26 Displays with the FUNCTION list opened MODE selected a
101. 4 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 9 SETUP MENU SETUP The SETUP list contains different sub lists and positions Some of them are directly related with vibration measurements and some with the settings of the hardware components of the instrument In order to open the SETUP list the user has to e press the MENU push button e select from the main list using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the SETUP text highlight it inversely e press the ENTER push button Display in the main list the SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely In the SETUP list the following items are available LANGUAGE it enables the user to set language of the user interface CLEAR SETUP it enables the user to return to the default factory setup EXTERNAL I O SETUP it enables the user to select the available functionality of the Ext I O port HUMAN VIB FILT it enables the user to activate HUMAN VIBRATION FILTERS This position appears only before activation of those filters IEPE CURRENT it enables the user to choose current IEPE supply REFERENCE LEVELS it enables the user to select the reference level for calculation of the vibration measurement results REMOTE COMMUNICATION it enables the user to select the type of remote communication and packet size for data transmission RMS INTEGRATION it enables the user to select the way of integration for the RMS measurement RPM MEASUREMENT it enables the user to
102. 5 SEED 9 5005 LOGGER 205115 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the POST selection for different LOGGER STEPS The value set in the POST is confirmed and the window is closed after pressing the ENTER push button After pressing the lt ESC gt push button the window is closed ignoring the settings made in the POST 5 4 3 Trigger parameters for recorder setting RECORDER TRIGGER The RECORDER TRIGGER enables the user to set the parameters of time domain signal recording on the external USB memory stick path MENU SETUP USB HOST PORT SRT RECORDING or WAVE RECORDING EVENT RECORDING n order to enter 5 18 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL RECORDER TRIGGER window the user has to select the RECORDER TRIGGER text in the TRIGGER SETUP window using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press ENTER oa TRIGGER SETUP MEASURE TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER TRIGGER SETUP window the RECORDER TRIGGER text highlighted 5 4 3 1 Selecting trigger mode TRIGGER In the TRIGGER position following options are available Off SLOPE SLOPE LEVEL LEVEL GRAD The selection is made by pressing lt lt lt gt gt push buttons and ENTER one The RECORDER TRIGGER window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER EELS TRIGGER z 5412 ORMSCID 118 8 mis 118 8 mis oa REC
103. AHD BAND LIMES 1688 LIMES LIMES 1688 1666 ao ENVELOPING ENVELOPING ENVELOPING FILTER _28 24 FILTER 29 BAHD BAHD LIMES 1688 16 LIMES 1688 ENVELOPING window the BAND selection 5 7 3 Selecting the number of the lines in enveloping spectrum LINES The LINES position enables the user to select the number of lines in the spectrum of enveloping There are three values available 400 800 and 1600 The selection of the value is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the change made in the position requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The ENVELOPING window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button oa ENVELOPING ENVELOPING ENVELOPING FILTER 28 8kHz FILTER 28 4kHz FILTER 28 8kHz 22 4kHz BRHD 22 4kHz BRHD 22 4kHz BAND LIHES LIHES LIHES ELEM ENVELOPING window the LINES selection 5 8 Selection of RPM measurements parameters RPM The RPM Revolutions Per Minute position appears in the INPUT list when the RPM function was activated with a special code in the SETUP list path MENU SETUP RPM This sub list is opened after the selection of the RPM text from the INPUT list by means of the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push
104. AN 956 USER MANUAL AVERAGING Ph E LINERR AVERAGING LINEAR AVERAGING 3 FILTER s 22 3kHz BRHD OP2 dkHz BH RECTANGLE WIHDOW FLAT TOP 1928 LINES 1920 LOGGER SER FFT sublist the WINDOW selection 5 5 5 Selecting the number of the lines of FFT analysis LINES The LINES position enables the user to select the number of lines of the FFT analysis There are three values available 1920 960 and 480 The selection of the value is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the change made in the position requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The FFT window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt 5 gt push button FFT FFT FFT RUERRGING LINERR RUERRGING LINERR RUERRGING LINERR FILTER Z FILTER Z FILTER 2 227 4kHz OZZ dkHz HO EINE FFT window the LINES selection 5 5 6 Enabling the FFT spectra time history logging LOGGER The LOGGER enables to record spectra of the FFT analysis in the logger file The activation of the logger is possible only if LOGGER functionality has been activated in the MEASUREMENT SETUP sublist path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LOGGER In order to switch on the logger of the FFT analysis the user has to press the lt gt gt push button and the ENTER one If instead of the ENTER push button th
105. ARKERS after pressing lt ALT gt and lt SHIFT gt together Low ENTER MARKER ENTER MARKER ENTER MARKER ENTER MARKER Fir s ENTER MARKER ENTER MARKER ENTER MARKER Ee Displays with the activated markers The exemplary presentation of the markers on the time history plot is shown below to view a plot with markers the user has to transfer data to the proper software 80 4 70 60 4 50 4 e Leq 40 LLL s Marker 1 Marker 2 30 4 Marker Marker 4 20 1 13 30 00 13 30 09 13 30 17 13 30 26 13 30 35 13 30 43 13 30 52 Time history plot with the indication of the active markers 2 5 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 2 2 and output sockets of the instrument The instrument inputs called Acceler and Probe are placed in the centre of the instrument s top cover The accelerometer have to be connected to the instrument using the TNC connector After plug in the accelerometer to the measurement input the screw should be twisted to the light resistance The full description of the signals connected to the sockets is given in the Appendix C Top cover of the SVAN 956 instrument in 1 1 scale In the bottom cover there are four sockets placed from the right to the left as follows Ext Pow USB Host USB Device USB Client and
106. AST CALIBRATION window opened with ten calibration records b 4 6 Displays with the LAST CALIBRATION enn enne 4 6 Display with the empty LAST CALIBRATION window inneren 4 6 CALIBRATION window TEDS text 22 220 40444 4 00 4 7 TEDS window opened NO DATA AVAILABLE message eene eene enne nette terrent nenne 4 7 INPUT text selected enit net gere lend eden exon 5 1 INPUT list in the LEVEL METER in 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE analyser b 5 1 FFT analyser c in ENVELOPING d and after activation of RPM option e eee 5 1 Displays with not active sub lists of INPUT list during measurement essen 5 1 Displays with the MEASUREMENT SETUP window ener tentent trennen 5 2 MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the START DELAY with 1 second step 5 2 MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the START DELAY with 10 seconds step 5 2 MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of INTEGR PERIOD with 1 step 5 3 MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the INTEGR PERIOD with 10 seconds step 5 3 MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the INTEGR PERIOD with 1 and 10 minut
107. ATION SH Delete SH Insert CURRENT REFERENCE LEUELS BAUD RATE REMOTE COMMUNICRTI TIME QUT RMS INTEGRATION RPM MENT n RS232 BAUD RATE TIME OUT 52 51 28 MAR 2007 modify press SHIFT lt or SHIFT gt mo SHIFT MODE Hormal n SHIFT MODE SHIFT 2nd Fun 5 5 HA a RNS INTEGRATION RPM MEASUREMENT 51 28 MAR 2887 To modify press SHIFT lt or SHIFT gt SVAN 956 USER MANUAL n USB HOST PORT U USB DISK SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING EUENT RECORDING n RERL TIME FILT C RSS R2 1 OHZ R3 gt dB a CS VPE Ri t a a USER FILTERS SPECTRUM BASED n VIBRATION UNITS a _HARNINGS SPECTRUM BASED RESULTS NOT SAUVI USB DISK FREE SP E MIN FREE SPACE a WARNINGS RESULTS NOT SAVED V USB DISK FREE SP V MIN FREE SPACE MEDIUS Control diagram of the SETUP list 3 2 Powering of the instrument The SVAN 956 can be powered by one of the following sources External DC power source 6 V DC 15 V DC 1 5 W SA 17A external battery pack operation time gt 24 h option Four AA standard internal batteries In the case of alkaline type fully charged set can operate more than 12 h 6 0 V 1 6 Ah Instead of the ordinary four AA rechargeable batteries can be used for charging
108. All settings are ignored after the return to the SETUP list by pressing the lt ESC gt push button In the case the timer function is active SINGLE REGULAR or IRREGULAR the clock icon starts blinking up to switching timer function off or up to finishing programmed measurements WUDE UU TIMER MODE MODE MODE START ba 5 En RPR START DAY G1 APR START HOUR START HOUR REPETITION 12 58 TIMER windows the mode selection 9 14 2 Setting day of the instrument s switch on START DAY The START DAY determines the date of the measurement start The timer can be programmed up to one month ahead and during the date setting the current state of the Real Time Clock is taken into account The required date can be selected pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons when the START DAY text is displayed inversely in the TIMER sub list The selected value has to be confirmed by pressing the lt ENTER gt push button which causes the simultaneous return to the SETUP list All settings are ignored after the return to the SETUP list by pressing the lt ESC gt push button 9 16 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL L TIMER TIMER TIMER TIMER SINGLE SINGLE REGULAR START DAY FEB START DAY Xj FEB START DAY START HOUR START HOUR START HOUR REPETITION 12 88 MODE IRREGULAR MODE IRREGULAR START DAY MAR START DAY Ell
109. C is not connected or there is any other reason that it does not receive the data The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and it returns to the REPORT list after pressing a push button The exemplary printed file contents are presented below C SVANTEK SVAN 956 No 12001 2007 08 18 v6 06 6 06 3 65324257 File name RES14 TITLE Ed SETTINGS Device VIBR METER sua a ay Accelerometer Device function LEVEL METER LEVEL METER version 6 06 Meas start date 2007 08 17 Meas start hour 18 01 04 sipu p Ref level for Acc l um s2 Ref level for Vel 1 nm s Ref level for Dil 1 pm Measure trigger Off Logger trigger Off Repeat cycle Infinity Start delay J S Integration time 10 s Calibr factor 0 0 dB RMS integration Linear Profile 1 2 3 Filter HP1 HP3 HP10 Detector 1 05 1 05 1 05 Logger Non on Non E RESULTS Measurement time 00 00 10 Prof 1 2 3 115mm s2 97 7mm s2 90 2mm s2 P P 211mm s2 188mm s2 176mm s2 MAX 24 3mm s2 20 9mm s2 18 2mm s2 RMS 20 0mm s2 18 0mm s2 16 2mm s2 VDV 49 5mm sX 44 2mm sX 39 4mm sX Remark X 1 75 Example of the print
110. CTRUM VIEW SPECTRUM VIEW RUERAGED FUERHGED zE 1 SPECTRUM VIEW windows the VIEW selection 6 2 3 2 Selection of the spectrum type for the presentation TYPE In the TYPE position the AVERAGED INSTANTENOUS MAX and MIN texts are available after pressing the lt gt gt push buttons Each text corresponds to the different spectrum type to be presented on the display in the graphical presentation modes a a a SPECTRUM VIEW SPECTRUM VIEW SPECTRUM VIEW SPECTRUM VIEW ERTEHDED ERTEHDED EXTEHDED r TYPE BS TYPE MIH SPECTRUM VIEW windows the TYPE selection 6 2 3 3 Selection of the MAX spectrum for the presentation MAX SVAN 956 USER MANUAL In the MAX position the corresponding spectrum can be selected by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons to be presented on the display in the graphical presentation modes a oa SPECTRUM UTEH SPECTRUM VIEW EXTENDED EXTENDED AVERAGED TYPE AVERAGED al 1 SPECTRUM VIEW windows the MAX selection 6 2 3 4 Selection of the MIN spectrum for the presentation MIN In the MIN position the corresponding spectrum can be selected by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons to be presented on the display in the graphical presentation modes oa oa SPECTRUM
111. DE E 97124119 SH Delete SH Insert SHi Delete 5H Insert PRESS ANY KEY Displays during the entering of the access code to a function 9 5 Selection of the current IEPE supply IEPE CURRENT The IEPE CURRENT enables the user to choose current IEPE supply In order to enter the window the user has to select the IEPE CURRENT text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one E EXTERHRL I 0 SETUP SETUP list the IEPE CURRENT text highlighted displayed inversely 9 8 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Two options are available 1 5 mA and 4 5 mA The selection is made by placing a special character in the required position by means of the lt gt gt or lt A gt v push buttons The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of a change made the position or ESC push buttons ignoring a change made the position oa a CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT windows the supply selection 9 6 Reference signal in vibration measurements REFERENCE LEVELS The REFERENCE LEVELS sub list enables the user to set the reference level of the vibration signal The values which are set here are taken into account during the calculations of the measurement results expressed in the logarithmic scale with the dB as the units In order
112. E SALE Saved D K 220 Press ENTER to SAUE Lous ed Press ESC to SKIP DELETE PRESS ANY KEY sHi Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY DEFRAGMENTATION Displays after the attempt to overwrite a file if the REPLACE is not active A Notice The direct access to the SAVE SAVE NEXT function is possible after pressing simultaneously the lt ENTER gt and lt ALT gt push buttons if the DIRECT SAVE option is switched off path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS DIRECT SAVE In another case DIRECT SAVE option is switched on the results are saved after pressing these push buttons in the file with the automatically incremented name A Notice After the usage of the lt ENTER gt and lt ALT gt push buttons if the DIRECT SAVE option is switched on the measurement results are saved only once The following pressing will not cause any instrument s reaction unless next measurement is performed The same result can be saved in the multiply number of files only using the SAVE SAVE NEXT function 7 6 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 7 2 Controlling the data storing in the instrument s memory SAVE OPTIONS The SAVE OPTIONS sub list is used for the selection of the options of data storing in the FLASH DISC memory of the instrument The sub list is opened after pressing the ENTER push button when the SAVE OPTIONS text in the FILE list is displayed inversely selected us
113. E SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIP SHirDelete SH Insert Delete 5 Insert Delete 5H Insert 5 1 SH Insert SAVE FILE SAUE SAVE FILE SAVE SAVE FILE SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC ta SKIF Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC ta SKIF S5H Delete SH gt Irsert 1 SH Insert J PSH Delete Insert SAVE FILE BeOCTa SAVE SAVE FILE Se0CTa SAVE SAVE FILE SAVE FILE 80 SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF S5H Delete Insert Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP S5H Delete SH Insert Delete SH Insert Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF SHirDelete 5H Insert Display during the selection of the character SAVE FILE 2800TA SAVE SAVE FILE 2208 CTA SAVE SAVE FILE 2200 CT SAVE SAVE FILE 2200 SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIF SH Delete SH Insert Delete S5H Insert S5Hs Delete 5
114. E 7 4 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Displays during the attempt of overwriting the existing file changing the name and saving data All changes introduced to the file name during the edition are ignored after pressing the lt ESC gt push button This pressing causes the return to the list from which the SAVE option was entered The return after the edition to the line with the SAVE or SAVE NEXT text is possible after pressing the v push button The simplified edition consists in the addition at the end of the file name the natural number The increase by one of the number is made automatically After the execution of the saving operation the new file name is displayed and the instrument waits then for a reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the ALT In the next attempt of saving data the new name is displayed in the FILE NAME line and that name is increased by one during the saving operation SAVE SAVE FILE HANE 2500CT9 FILE 25 SAVE 2380CT11 Press ENTER to SRUE Saved D K Press ENTER to SRUE Saved D K Press ESC ta SKIP Press ESC ta SKIP Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY Displays in the simplified edition of the file name and the execution of the saving operation The number can be changed from 0 to N The only limitation of the N value is the length of the file name which cannot
115. E SPACE LOGGER AVAILABLE remain unchanged while the TOTAL AVAILABLE is increased 7 4 2 Deleting logger files LOGGER FILES In order to enter the window one has to press the lt gt push button on the inversely displayed LOGGER FILES text of the DELETE sub list using the lt A gt lt lt gt lt A gt with lt SHIFT gt or lt lt gt with lt SHIFT gt push buttons The DELETE sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button In order to enter the list of the saved logger files in the memory one has to press the lt ENTER gt push button In the case when the logger files were not saved in the memory the special message is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user The user should press any push button except the lt SHIFT gt and lt ALT gt DELETE Er eS gt ENTER gt SETUP FILES LOGGER FILES selected to be deleted and the memory does not contain any file After pressing the lt ENTER gt push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the LOGGER FILES entering is impossible In such case the message is displayed and the instrument returns after few seconds to the DELETE sub list SVAN 956 USER MANUAL MEASUREMENT PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress The similar data about the existi
116. ETE DELETE ALL DEFRAGMENTATION a a FILE LOAD s LOAD _ SAVE FILE NO SRUE DPTIDNS FILE MEE bevel eee UIBR 1 DELETE L FILE DELETE ALL HUGE HU d DEFRAGMENTATION a FILE X SRUE A Seas ZAVE OPTIONS B LOAD as SETUP FILES DEFRAGMENTATION DELETE RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES SETUP FILES DELETE ALL RESULT FILES 1 LOGGER FILES E 1 SETUP FILES rE Press ENTER te DELETI a FILE SAVE SAVE OPTIONS LOAD DELETE DEFRAGMENTATION DELETE ALL RESULT FILES Press ENTER to DELETE SVAN 956 USER MANUAL DEFERGHEHTRT ION DEFRRGH FILES DEFRAGMENT LOGGER DEFRAGMENT n DEFRAGMENTATION unnecessary PRESS ANY KEY DEFRAGMENTATION _ LOGGER DEFRAG Are you sure n m LOGGER DEFRAG DEFRAGMENTATION unnecessary Are you sure PRESS ANY KEY Lu CATALOGUE HO FILES mo FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE 16247414 SAVE SETUP FILE FAN Press EHTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press UP to EDIT LOAD SETUP FILES Control diagram of the FILE list REPORT one of the main lists available after pressing the lt MENU gt push button to use option from this list the instrument has to be connected to RS232 or to a PC connected to a printer gt
117. ETUP The LOAD SETUP is used for loading setup setting file from the FLASH DISC e g for performing different type of measurements with different instrument s settings The position is opened after pressing the lt gt push button when the LOAD SETUP text in the FILE list is displayed inversely selected using the v or lt gt gt or v or lt gt gt with the lt SHIFT gt push buttons The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button 7 34 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL SAVE SETUP FILE list with the LOAD SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely A Notice It is not possible to load the file during the execution of the measurements On such attempt the message MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS is displayed for about 3 seconds After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the file loading is impossible and the message is displayed MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress In the case when the setup files were not saved after entering the LOAD SETUP window the NO FILES text is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user The user should press then the lt ESC gt ENTER the instrument returns to the FILE list or START STOP gt push button the instrument starts the measurement
118. FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE mi TOTAL _AWAILABLE FILES FREE 5 mi TOUTRL RURILRBELE Execution of the amp LOG107 file deletion from the logger memory and its influence on the memory space LOGGER AVAILABLE The displays below illustrates the erasing from the logger memory another big file 29 named amp LOG113 just after the erasing of the file amp LOG107 the FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE and LOGGER FREE SPACE remain unchanged while the LOGGER AVAILABLE is increased a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE mi TOTAL AVAILABLE 12875228 bytes LOGGER FREE SPACE 15883792 bytes LOGGER AVAILABLE meri a E Deleted 0 15576335 bytes LOGGER FREE SPACE PRESS ANY KEY 15505792 bytes 158356384 bytes Execution of the amp LOG113 file deletion and the influence of this process on the memory space 7 4 3 Deleting files with setup settings SETUP FILES In order to enter the window has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed SETUP FILES text of the DELETE sub list using the v lt gt gt v with lt SHIFT gt or lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push buttons The DELETE sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button In order to enter the list of the saved setup files in the memory one has to press the ENTER push button In the case when the setup files were not saved in the memory the special me
119. Fress ESC to SKIF Fress ESC to SKIF S5H Delete 5H Insert S5Hz Delete SH Insert Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Fress ESC to SKIF Fress ESC to SKIF S5H Delete 5H z Inzert 5H Delete Insert Displays in the FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt push buttons The edited name is accepted and the setup file is saved after pressing the lt ENTER gt push button The special warning is displayed in the case the file with the edited name already exists in the memory if the REPLACE position is not activated path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS The instrument waits then for a reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the lt ALT gt 7 32 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL _ SAVE SETUP SAVE OPTIONS FILE FILE DELETE RLL SAVE LEU DEFFRIHENTRT LOM SAVE STATISTICS sz ue usedi CATALOGUE Press ENTER to SAVE AUTO SAVE FREE SPACE Press ESC to SKIP DIRECT SAVE SHi Delete SH Insert SAVE SPECT PRESS ANY KEY LORD SETUP SAVE SETUP _ _SAVE SETUP 5 FILE FILE HRHME LEL MG FILE HRHMEsLEU nil DELETE RLL SAVE NI SRUE LEU H1 DEFRAGMENTATION a Saved CATALOGUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE FREE SPACE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIF Press UP to EDIT SH Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY LOAD SETUP Displays during the attempt of overwriting the existin
120. GE IEEE RAGE RMS RMS CHP 6 68mmi s 44 ome zlimm s 6657 52 Zi immis 94 4m s Displays with change of the default range values caused by the calibration factor 5 3 Setting parameters in a profile PROFILE x The user enters the PROFILE x sub list after pressing the ENTER push button on the displayed inversely PROFILE x text which has to be selected by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In the PROFILE x sub list the following parameters can be programmed independently for each profile weighting filter FILTER RMS detector type DETECTOR and profile s results logged in a file LOGGER PEAK LOGGER P P LOGGER MAX and LOGGER RMS IHPUT IHPUT IHPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 ROFILE 3 R FILE 3 TRIGGER SETUP TRIGGER SETUP INPUT list with the PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 and PROFILE 3 selected A Notice The change of the profile parameters is not possible when the measurement is performed The user has to finish the current measurement 5 3 1 Weighting filter selection in a profile FILTER The following weighting filters are available in a profile of the instrument in the case of acceleration measurements HP1 HP3 HP10 KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg and Wb PR FILEC1 5 PR FILEC1 PR FILEC1 FILTER t DETECTOR 1 8 LOGGE
121. GER START DELAY 15 LEVEL START DELAY is TRIGGER LEVEL IMTEGE PERIOD sr 5 12 IMTEGE PERIOD Pe REP CYCLE 16 8 mis REP CYCLE LOGGER B 188s LOGGER LOGGER STEP 8 0 8885 LOGGER ie LOGGER amp LOG23 MEASUR SETUP LOGGER TRIGGER START DELAY sn TRIGGER LEVEL PERIOD z RHECID LOGGER HRHME amp LOGz 3 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the PRE selection for different LOGGER STEPS The value set in the PRE is confirmed and the window is closed after pressing the ENTER push button After pressing the lt ESC gt push button the window is closed ignoring the settings made in the PRE 5 4 2 5 Selection of the number of the results to be saved in the logger after the fulfilment of the triggering condition POST 5 17 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL In the POST line the number of the results registered in the logger s file after the fulfilment of the triggering condition can be set This number is within the limits 0 200 and can be set with the step equal to one using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons or the step equal to 10 using the lt lt gt lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt oa oa oa oa HERSUR SETUP LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIGGER START DELAY 11 5 IMTEGE PERIOD TRIGGER LEVEL TRIGGER LEUEL TRIGGER LEVEL SOURCE 1 RMSCID SOURCE 1 RMSCID SOURCE 1 RMSCID 116 4 mis 116 4 mis E 1B H mis s 58 55 20 s 58 55 2
122. GER AVAILABLE become equal while the FILES FREE SPACE and TOTAL AVAILABLE remain unchanged EREE SPACE FREE SPHCE ____ SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE RURILRELE FILES FREE SPACE RURILRBLE 15879858 bytes 15879858 bytes 15879858 bytes 15879858 bytes TOTAL_AWAILABLE LOGGER FREE SPACE TOTAL_AWAILABLE LOGGER FREE SPACE 15875858 bytes 15842148 bytes 15875858 bytes 15858484 bytes LOGGER FREE SPACE LOGGER AVAILABLE LOGGER FREE SPACE LOGGER AVAILABLE 15842148 bytes 15590404 bytes 155590404 bytes F 155590404 bytes Result of the LOGGER DEFRAGMENTATION operation 7 7 Checking the contents of the memory CATALOGUE The CATALOGUE is used for checking the contents of the memory the list of the result and setup files In order to enter the window the user has to select the CATALOGUE text in the FILE list using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the lt ENTER gt one FILE LETE DELETE RLL DEFRAGMENTATION FREE SPACE SAVE SETUP CATALOGUE text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE list In the case when the instrument memory is empty no file is stored after entering the CATALOGUE the NO FILES text is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user The user should press then the lt ESC gt ENTER the instrument returns to the FILE list or START STOP push button the instrument starts the
123. GGER TRIGGER and RECORDER TRIGGER sub lists The return to the INPUT list is made after pressing the ESC push button SVAN 956 USER MANUAL TRIGGER SETUP IHPUT INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE gt ENTER gt SESE MEASUREMENT RANGE gt LOGGER TRIGGER PROFILE 1 RECORDER TRIGGER PROFILE 2 PROFILE 5 TRIGGER SETUP PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 TRIGGER SETUP TRIGGER SETUP selected in the INPUT list and the TRIGGER SETUP window 5 4 1 Trigger parameters setting MEASURE TRIGGER The MEASURE TRIGGER is a contexts sub list in which the triggering can be switched off or on TRIGGER in the case when on the source of the triggering signal can be determined SOURCE its level LEVEL and sometimes also the speed of changes GRADIENT In order to enter this sub list the user has to select by means of the lt gt lt lt gt push buttons the MEASURE TRIGGER text in the TRIGGER SETUP sub list and press the ENTER one oa MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER iz SLOPE TRIGGER LEVEL TRIGGER GRAD ste RHECID 1 e SOURCE 1 116 6 mis EER LEVEL 116 0 m z GRADIENT MEASURE TRIGGER windows In order to change the displayed inversely parameter the user has to press the A v push buttons The confirmation of any change made in the window requires pressing the ENTER pu
124. ILE NAME In the case the REP CYCLE is greater than one the AUTO SAVE operation will be performed after the period set in the INTEGR PERIOD The name of the file with the main results is changed after each saving In the same when the LOGGER is On the partial measurement results are calculated in the period set in the LOGGER STEP Up to 12 results can be logged simultaneously from three independent profiles of the instrument PEAK MAX RMS from each profile path MENU INPUT PROFILE x where X 1 2 and 3 with time step down to 2 ms These results are saved in one logger s file memory of the instrument in the LEVEL METER as well as for other functions The name of the file is set in the LOGGER NAME position The registration in the logger s memory is stopped after the period which is 5 6 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL equal to INTEGR PERIOD multiplied by REP CYCLE after pressing the lt START STOP gt push button or after stopping the measurements remotely REP CYCLE REP CYCLE REP CYCLE REP CYCLE n 1 n 1 n N 1 n N signal amplitude T time measurements INTEGR PERIOD INTEGR PERIOD INTEGR PERIOD INTEGR PERIOD e 4 pia gt o sig1 svn j sig2 svn sigN 1 svn sigN svn O main results main results main results main results 2 integration period integration period integration period integration period c from 0 to T from T to 2T from N 2 T from
125. ILTER position the TYPE and CAL F positions appear on the display TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 FILTER Fuss TOTAL 3 FILTER TOTAL x windows the weighting filters selection in VM 6 2 4 1 Selecting the type of the spectrum in VM to be presented TYPE In the TYPE three options are available ACC acceleration VEL velocity and DIL displacement The selection is made by lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing ENTER to confirm Ll Ll 1 TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 FILTER 51 g CAL F TOTALx windows the TYPE selection 6 2 4 2 Setting the calibration factor for the presented spectrum in VM CAL F In the CAL F the user can introduce CALIBRATION FACTOR value from 60 0 dB to 60 0 dB using lt gt gt push buttons with 0 1 dB step or using lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons with the lt SHIFT gt with 1 dB step In order to confirm all changes made in this window the user has to press the ENTER After pressing ESC the settings made there are ignored and the instrument returns to the TOTAL VALUES window 6 13 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL oa TOTAL 1 TOTAL 1 51 TOTALx windows CALIBRATION FACTOR setting 6 2 5 Setting the parameters of the logger files presentation LOGGER VIEW The LOGGER VIEW enables the user to change the shape of the graphical presentation and a TIME parameter In order to enter this window one has to pr
126. ILTERS REAL TIME FILTERS SPECTRUM BASED FILTER eee USER FILTERS windows REAL TIME FILTERS selected a SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS selected b 9 16 1 Introduction the parameters of real time filters REAL TIME FILTERS The REAL TIME FILTERS sub list enables the user to introduce the values of the correcting coefficients taken into account in the real time measurements In order to enter this sub list the user has to select the REAL TIME FILTERS text in the USER FILTERS list using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the lt ENTER gt After pressing ENTER push button the window for entering the access code to an option is opened the first essay of its execution The REAL TIME FILTERS sub list contains 3 positions R1 R2 R3 n USER FILTERS REAL TIME FILTERS SPECTRUM BASED FILTER USER FILTERS windows REAL TIME FILTERS selected URLID CODE a ENTER CODE 1 411 a ENTER CODE a SH Delete SH Insert SHi Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY Displays during the entering of the access code to REAL TIME FILTERS 9 16 1 1 Selecting real time filter Rx The selection of the filter is made by means of the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation is made after pressing ENTER push button The return to the USER FILTERS window ignoring any changes made in the sub list is made after pressing
127. ION operation which merges files should be used to increase the FREE SPACE The next two numbers given in the FREE SPACE window named LOGGER FREE SPACE and LOGGER AVAILABLE characterize the logger files memory where the saving mechanism is the same Therefore the numbers presented in the FREE SPACE window depend on the history of the measurements and the operations performed by the user 7 30 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE et TOTAL AWAILABLE FREE SPACE window with the number depending on the measurements and operations performed The window is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt gt or lt 5 gt push buttons or it starts the measurements after pressing the START STOP one 7 9 Saving setup files in the instrument s memory SAVE SETUP The SAVE SETUP is used for storing setup settings in the internal non volatile FLASH DISC memory files are always written at the beginning of a free continuous space as a file see Appendix B for the file formats In order to enter the window the user has to select the SAVE SETUP text in the FILE list using the A v or lt gt gt push button and press the ENTER one FILE DELETE RLL DEFRRGHEHTRTIGOH CATALOGUE FREE SPACE LOAD SETUP SAVE SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE list There are two available functions the SAVE NEXT save a setup f
128. LAY SCALE DISPLRY DISPLRY SETUP DISPLAY MODES SPLAY SCALE LOGGER UTEH LOGGER SCREEN SETUP BATTERY UHIT LABEL 1 1 DISPLRY SETUP I SCALE L GGER UIEM MIEL ILABLE T DISPLRY 1 DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY SETUP 510855 LOGGER UTE 16 5 SETUP BATTERY FREE 15007 UNIT LRBEL AVAILABLE 15887 KB DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES _SEREEN SETUP DISPLAY Fates CONTRAST BATTERY pu Hs UNIT LABEL BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT V L BATTERY B TERNAL POHER DISPLAY BATTERY 12 10 DISPLAY MODES mammal T T TT B VOLTAGE AU BATTERY USB POHER 5 00 UNIT LRBEL lt C SURNTEK SURN 956 SN 12001 a DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES SCREEN SETUP ORY 52 BATTERY LEVEL METER v6 66 WATT LABEL ANALYZER 96 06 5 Control diagram of the DISPLAY list SVAN 956 USER MANUAL FILE one of the main lists available after pressing the MENU push button gt SAVE name of the file available values SAVE NEXT SAVE SAVE NEXT option simplifies the way of saving the file the file name is generated automatically basing on the date set in the instrument or on the last name given for the file next result is saved as a file with the name increased by one e g 11 11JAN1 11JAN2 n the SAVE option the name of the file can be fully edited in the FILE NAME window after pressing the lt A gt push butto
129. LE position path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE LOG or LIN e g 10 m s can be presented as 140 dB 5 1 Selection of measurement parameters MEASUREMENT SETUP The MEASUREMENT SETUP is opened after the selection of the MEASUREMENT SETUP text from the INPUT list by means of the A v A v with lt SHIFT gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER one The MEASUREMENT SETUP consists of the parameters which can be set or switched on off namely the delay of the start of measurements START DELAY the integration period INTEGR PERIOD the repetition of the measurement cycles REP CYCLE and the logger activation or deactivation LOGGER If the logger is active the user can set the logging period LOGGER STEP and give a name to the logger s file LOGGER NAME In order to change the displayed inversely parameter the user has to press the lt A gt v push buttons The confirmation of any change made in the sub list requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the sub list The MEASUREMENT SETUP is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt 5 gt push button HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP START DELAY ic 12s 5TRET DELAY is REP CYCLE LOGGER OFF INTEGR PERIOD is Displays with the MEASUREMENT SETUP window 5 1 1 Setting time delay before the start of measurements START DELAY
130. LLETAS SETUP INSTELLING LANGUAGE gt ZERO SETUP DRGTIID LIMIETEH EXPOSITIETIIE I SETUP TEPE CURRENT SETUP REBLRGES EDS STATIST ARCHIVO OPCIOHES CARGAR BORRAR BORRAR TOCO DEFRAGMENTAC IAH Ustawienia zapisu Wczytaj Usut Usur wszystko Defragmentacja HEHU FUNKCTS EHEHET EIJELZ amp FAJL JELEHT S BEALLETAS oa BESTAND SAUE OPTIES LRRD WISSEH WIS RLLES DEFRAGMENTATIE FIL 3 TRIGGER SVAN 956 USER MANUAL MEASURE K SLELTET S SETUP HEHU FUHCTIE Instellingen LAY oa MEASURE DELAI START SETUP oa FUHCI H FuHC MEDICI H CRLIBRRCI H Displays with the Spanish version of the user interface Sprachauswahl ISH ESPRR L ITALIANO FLEMISH FRAHCAIS DILLRHGURGE gt 1 FLEMISH 1 FRANCAIS 1 MAGYAR 1 POLSKI 1 Speicheroptionen laden l schen alles l schen Defragmentation HERSUR SETUP EH LOGGER amp L G16 druska Datei Hr DSL itaas ERIT Pegelmessung amp Schall3 Log Datei amp LOG Datum 02 MAR 2887 Zeit 16 51 54 AYARLAR LANGUAGE AYARLARI SIL GOHDO2 L M T KAL ZAH EXT IO AYARI CURRENT Mess Einstell Startuerz ger Interar Zeit Wiederholungen Logger Loggerzeit is Logger Hame amp L0G16 SOMUCLART YAZDIR ISTRTISTIK VAZDR Displays with the Tu
131. LOGGER switches on and off the functionality which enables the user to save in a file the selected results from three profiles with the defined period The LOGGER can be activated and deactivated by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and accepted by the ENTER one The acceptation closes simultaneously the MEASUREMENT SETUP window Any changes are ignored after pressing the lt ESC gt push button HERSUE oa MEASUR SETUP _MEASUR SETUP START DELAY s START DELAY ish IHTEGE PERIOD da REP CYCLE DI B r Inf L GGER OFF TEP is LOGGER HRME amp LOB12 5 Displays with the LOGGER deactivated and activated SETUP The LOGGER functionality is not included in the standard set of the instrument It can be bought together with the instrument ordering the proper option or can be purchased by the user in the future In the latter case after selecting On value the user has to introduce special code activating the functionality After successful activation the logger remains available and the instrument never more asks for the code HERSUR SETUP START DELAY ish iz Inf a ENTER CODE ENTER CODE 97124119 VALID CODE LOGGER STEP LOGGER 10512 SH Delete Insert SH Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY Displays during setting the LOGGER STEP available values in a sequence 1 2 5 5 1 5 Setting time period between two writings to the logg
132. MANUAL 7 12 Copying files to the external USB memory stick COPY FILES TO USB The COPY FILES TO USB is used for copying files to the external USB memory stick The position is opened after pressing the ENTER push button when the COPY FILES TO USB text in the FILE list is displayed inversely The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing the lt 5 gt push button n a FILE D a COPY FILES CATALOGUE RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES it SETUP FILES DIRECTORY 25JhH b Press EHTER to COPY FREE SPACE SAVE SETUP LOAD SETUP DIRECTORY a FILE list with the COPY FILES TO USB text selected a and the COPY FILES window opened b The COPY FILES TO USB sub list consists of three positions to be selected RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES and SETUP FILES and DIRECTORY position with the name of the directory in which the files from the internal memory of the instrument will be stored In order to copy required type of the files the user has to place the special character in the line with the RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES or SETUP FILES text using the lt gt gt or v push button After next pressing the ENTER push button when no option is selected the window is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list The return to the FILE list is also possible after pressing the lt 5 gt push button D a n FILES FILES RESULT FILES v n COPY FILES EA if RESULT FILES
133. ME edition after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push button eese eene 7 4 FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt push buttons eese 7 4 Displays during the attempt of overwriting the existing file changing the name and saving data 7 5 Displays in the simplified edition of the file name and the execution of the saving 7 5 Displays in the simplified edition of the file name saving and the saturation of that operation 7 5 Displays after the attempt to perform unavailable saving operation and the return to the SAVE NEXT 7 5 Display after the SAVE operation when there were no results for storing 7 6 View of all displays during and after the execution of the SAVE operation 7 6 Displays after the attempt to overwrite a file if the REPLACE is not active 7 6 FILE list with the SAVE OPTIONS text highlighted displayed inversely eee 7 7 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the RAM FILE enne 7 7 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the REPLACE a 7 8 Displays during the file saving when the REPLACE is switched off and on 7 8 SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the AUTO SAVE
134. ME2 TIME4 is used to determine four irregular automatic starts of the measurements The required hour be selected pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons when the TIMEx text is displayed inversely in the TIMER sub list mode IRREGULAR In order to set minutes one has to enter the proper line pressing the lt A gt v push buttons and then pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons to select the proper value The selected value has to be confirmed by pressing the ENTER push button which causes the simultaneous return to the SETUP list All settings are ignored after the return to the SETUP list by pressing the lt ESC gt push button 9 14 5 Selecting the period between two consecutive measurements REPETITION The REPETITION of the timer function is selected pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons when the REPETITION text is displayed inversely in the TIMER sub list mode REGULAR This parameter can be programmed from 00 00 up to 99 59 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL In order to set the proper value one has to select hours or minutes pressing the lt A gt v push buttons and then pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons to select the proper value The selected value has to be confirmed by pressing the ENTER push button which causes the simultaneous return to the SETUP list All settings are ignored after the return to the SETUP list by pressing the lt ESC gt push bu
135. NSTRUMENT FUNCTION In order to select the FUNCTION list one has to press the MENU push button select by means of the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the FUNCTION text and press the ENTER The FUNCTION list contains three elements MODE MEASUREMENT FUNCTION and CALIBRATION The list is closed and the instrument returns to the presentation mode after pressing the lt ESC gt push button HEHU a a a FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION MODE PETENTE MEASUREMENT FUNCTION CAL IBRATIOH CTIO MEASUREMENT FUNCT IOM CALIBRAT IOH CHLIBRRHTIGH b 4 Displays with the main list the FUNCTION text selected and the FUNCTION list opened the MODE selected b the MEASUREMENT FUNCTION selected c and the CALIBRATION selected d 4 1Selecting the mode of the instrument MODE In order to select the required mode the user has to enter the MODE position in the FUNCTION sub list using v push buttons and press the ENTER one A mode is selected by placing the special character in the line with the mode s name The position of the character can be changed using the lt A gt v push buttons After placing the character in the line with the option s name the user has to press the ENTER push button oa FUNCTION MODE MEASUREMENT FUNCTION CRLIBFRTION MODE ACCELERATION ACCELERATION 1 VOLTAGE VOLTAGE b FUNCTION list opened MODE selected
136. ODES SPECTRUM 7 3 Loading the files with the measurement results LOAD The LOAD is used for loading data file from the FLASH DISC e g for the verification or comparison The position is opened after pressing the ENTER push button when the LOAD text in the FILE list is displayed inversely selected using the lt A gt v lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing the lt 5 gt push button FILE SAVE SAUE OPTIONS DELETE DELETE RLL DEFRAGMENTAT IOH FILE list with the LOAD text highlighted displayed inversely 7 12 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL A Notice It is not possible to load the file during the execution of the measurements On such attempt the message MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS is displayed for about 3 seconds After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the file loading is impossible and the message is displayed MEASUREMENT PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress In the case when the instrument memory is empty no file is stored after entering the LOAD window the NO FILES text is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user The user should press then the ESC ENTER the instrument returns to the FILE list or START STOP push button the in
137. ORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER TRIGGER ENZEENNNNNNN TIEA PMS lt 12 118 8 mis L1 RECORDER TRIGGER oa RECORDER TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER RMSCID SOURCE LEVEL 16 8 mis GRADIENT 16dB ms SOURCE s RMS 13 LEVEL 118 8 mis RECORDER TRIGGER windows the TRIGGER selection 5 4 3 2 Selecting the triggering signal SOURCE In the case when in the TRIGGER position SLOPE or SLOPE is selected it is possible to choose the SOURCE Available sources are RMS 1 and EXT I O The selection is made using lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing ENTER one The RECORDER TRIGGER window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button oa ao Ll RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER TRIGGER _ SLOPE TRIGGER _ SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE SOURCE SOURCE Y SOURCE E LEUEL 16 8 mis LEVEL 118 8 mis RECORDER TRIGGER windows the source selection for SLOPE and SLOPE b 5 4 3 3 Selecting level for recording trigger LEVEL The level of the triggering signal for recording LEVEL can be set in 1 dB step or 10 dB steps from 1 mm s to 10 km s 60 dB to 140 dB range using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons or lt lt gt lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt The level can be expressed not only in in linear units path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP SCALE LIN but also
138. POLARISATION text The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes made there or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring all changes L oa EXT SETUP EXT SETUP MODE DIGITAL OUT MODE DIGITAL OUT FUNCTION TRIG PULSE FUNCTION TRIG PULSE POLARISATION 5 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the POLARISATION selection 9 3 4 Active level selection of the digital output signal ACTIVE LEVEL In the ACTIVE LEVEL it is possible to select which level of the signal should be treated as a valid one or positive logic In order to select the level the user has to use the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons in the active line with the ACTIVE LEVEL text The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes made there or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring all changes OURC OURC ALARM LEVEL imm mdB RLRRM LEVEL dE EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the ACTIVE LEVEL selection 9 3 5 Source signal selection for the alarm pulse generation SOURCE In the SOURCE it is possible to select the measurement result which level should be checked If the measured result level is greater than selected alarm level the instrument will generate alarm signal on the socket The measurement resu
139. R PROFILEC1 FILTER _ EA ETECTOR 1 8 LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS LOGGER PEAK C PEAK 2E LOGGE 1 LOGGER LOGGER P P 1 1 1 5 8 oa PROFILEC1 PROFILEC1 PROFILE i gt LOGGER MAK LOGGER RMS a PROFILE i gt FILTER SVAN 956 USER MANUAL oa PROFILEC1 FILTER DETECTOR 1 L GGER PEHK L GGER P P LOGGER MAK LOGGER RMS PROFILEC4 DETECTOR DETECTOR 1 65 LOGGER FEAF LOGGER FEAF LOGGER P P LOGGER MAX E LOGGER RMS 1 1 SEI LOGGER RMS 1 PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter in acceleration measurements in the case of velocity measurements Vel1 Vel3 Vel10 and VelMF 1 Aelia PROFILECAY uelim PROFILEC4 eli S a PROFILE i gt FILTER MIHI PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter in velocity measurements in the case of displacement measurements Dil1 Dil3 and Dil10 PROFILECi gt FILTER SSC NN PROFILEC4 ir PROFILECi gt FILTER Se LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the weighting filter in displacement measurements for all types of signal it is possible to use real time filters R1 R2 R3 if they are activated in the SETUP list path SETUP USER FILTERS REAL TIME FILTERS PROFILE 4 gt FILTER DETEC
140. R TRIGGER SOURCE 12 SOURCE 12 LEUEL 216 8 mis LEUEL 116 8 mis MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the SLOPE modes selected In the case when the LEVEL is selected in each second of the measurement the triggering condition is checked the measurement is registered only when the signal has the greater level than this determined in the LEVEL and in the other case the measurement result is skipped In the case when the LEVEL is selected in each second of the measurement the triggering condition is checked the measurement is registered only when the signal has the lower level than this determined in the LEVEL and in the other case the measurement result is skipped a MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER TSR SOURC RMS SOURC RCE 12 RHSC12 LEUEL 116 8 mis LEVEL 116 8 mis MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL modes selected In the case when the GRAD is selected in each second of the measurement the triggering condition is checked the measurement is registered only when the signal has the greater level than this determined in the LEVEL and the speed of the signal changes is not less than that selected in the GRADIENT In the other case the measurement result is skipped MEASURE TRIGGER ET ORMSCID 116 4 mis GERDIEHT 1 dBems MEASURE TRIGGER window with the GRAD mode selected 5 4 1 2 Selection of the triggering signal SOURCE It is assumed that o
141. R one SETUP list the USB HOST PORT text highlighted displayed inversely The socket USB Host can be used to serve as the input of the different interfaces RS 232 or USB The RS 232 interface in the SVAN 95x instrument is available as a hardware option a special interface named as the SV 55 with a dedicated microprocessor has to be attached to the socket USB Host The RS232 is the default setting in this window Only in this option the USB host controller is awaken and the power consumption is the lower one An error occurs in the case of the connection to the socket the peripheral device of the different type than the selected one USB HOST PORT USB HOST PORT SB HOST PORT USB IrDA x USB IrDA USB DISK B DISK USE DISK SRT RECORDING SRT RECORDING SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING WAVE RECORDING WAVE RECDORDIHG EUEHT RECORDING EUEHT RECORDING EUEHT RECORDING USB HOST PORT FS232 USE IrDA USE DISK SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING EWENT RECORDING Displays in the USB HOST PORT The selection of the socket s functionality is made with the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons which moves the special character between the available options The selection is confirmed after pressing the ENTER push button which closes the window and returns to the SETUP list The return to this list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the selection is not confirmed
142. REMENT PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress The same data about the existing in the instrument files as in the FILE LOAD window are displayed after successful opening the FILE DELETE RESULT FILES one pressing the lt ENTER gt push button The current number of the file and the total number of the saved files is displayed in the first line of the window 7 15 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The name of the file is displayed in the second line its current number is presented in the first line The name of the file suggests the operation the file was created in The names in which the first character is are coming from the AUTO SAVE function The file with the default name Timer is coming from the AUTO SAVE function executed in the TIMER operation The other names suggest the SAVE SAVE NEXT function The type of the current file LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT or ENVELOPING and the mode VIBR is given in the third line If during the measurements which results are saved in the file the logger file was also created its name is displayed in the fourth line A Notice The logger file can be deleted from the instrument s memory in the FILE DELETE LOGGER FILES window and this deleting operation does not modify the contents of the fourth line of the DELETE window The DATE and TIME of the SAVE operation are displayed in the fifth and sixth
143. RESULT FILES 7 16 Execution of the EXAMP4 file deletion and the influence of this process on the memory space 7 17 Execution of the 9EXAMPS file deletion and the influence of this process on the memory space 7 17 LOGGER FILES selected to be deleted and the memory does not contain any 402442 1 2 7 17 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 18 Selection of the LOGGER FILES to be 4 1 neen een eene ener 7 18 Execution of the LOGGER FILES 7 18 Execution of the amp LOG107 file deletion from the logger memory and its influence the memory space EOGGER AVAILEABDLDE eret n to iiir tette i te eia entere e tec enr een 7 19 Execution of the amp LOG113 file deletion and the influence of this process on the memory space 7 19 SETUP FILES selected to be deleted and the instrument s memory does not contain any 7 19 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 20 Selection of the SETUP FILES to be deleted seseeeeseeeseeeeeeeeneeeren 7 20 Execution of the RESULT FILES d letf n n
144. S 40AE prepolarised 77 microphone with nominal sensitivity 50 mV Pa SV 3185D accelerometer with SC 27 cable SC 16 USB 1 1 cable SC 59 I O cable SC 61 integrated connector four AA batteries SvanPC for windows 2000 XP software 1 4 Accessories available SA 17A external battery pack SA 27 3185 mounting magnet for the accelerometer SA 18 Carrying bag for SVAN 95x and accessories leather SA 43 carrying case for SVAN 95x and accessories SA 45 carrying case for SVAN 9xx and accessories waterproof SA 46 carrying belt bag for SVAN 94x and SVAN 95x leather SA 47 carrying bag for SVAN 95x and accessories fabric material SV 55 RS 232 option for the SVAN 955 1 5 Software options available SVAN956 Vibration Meter amp FFT Analyser SVAN956 WA SVAN 956 without accelerometer and SC 27 cable 5 956 1 SVAN 956 including 1 1 amp 1 3 octave SVAN956 1WA SVAN 956 WA including 1 1 amp 1 3 oct SV 956 3 1 1 amp 1 8 octave analysis option SV 956 8 Rotation measurement option including Laser Tachometer SV 956 9 Human Vibration filters option SV 956 11 Enveloping analysis option SV 956 15 Time domain signal recording option SV 956 16 User programmable second order band pass filters SVAN 956 USER MANUAL A Notice The software options can be purchased in any time as only the introduction of the special code is required for their activation SVAN 956 instrument with the accelerometer and
145. SHORT AUTO SAVE DISABLED PRESS AHY KEV Display when INT PERIOD is too short for AUTO SAVE option 5 1 3 Setting the number of repetition of measurement cycles REP CYCLE The REP CYCLE defines the number of cycles with the measurement period defined in the INTEGR PERIOD which should be performed by the instrument The required parameter can be set by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons with the step equal to 1 or by means of the lt gt gt push buttons pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one with the step equal to 20 The selected value is accepted by pressing the ENTER push button which closes the MEASUREMENT SETUP window Inf value denotes the infinite repetition of the measurements until the pressing the START STOP gt push button or after receiving the remote control code The REP CYCLE number values are within the limits 1 1000 a oa MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP START DELAY ds sTRRT DELAY ds sTRRT DELAY 1s START DELAY 1s PERIOD is IMTEGR PERIOD IMTEGR PERIOD IMTEGR PERIOD CYCLE CYCLE CYCLE X L GGER OFF L GGER 0 L GGER 0 LOG REP CYCLE setting with the step equal to 20 5 1 4 Logger functionality switching On Off LOGGER 5 4 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The
146. SPECTRUM SPECTRUM SPECTRUM SPECTRUM TYPE windows with the available values 6 2 3 Setting the parameters of the logger files presentation SPECTRUM VIEW The SPECTRUM VIEW enables the user to change the shape of the graphical presentation VIEW and a TYPE parameter as well as to activate the presentation on the display the MAX and MIN spectrum In the VIEW position the EXTENDED FULL and NORMAL views are available by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In the TYPE position the AVERAGED INSTANTENOUS MAX and MIN texts are available by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to enter this window has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed LOGGER VIEW text of the DISPLAY SETUP sub list The LOGGER VIEW window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY SETUP sub list after pressing the ESC the settings made there are not confirmed or the ENTER push button the settings are confirmed oa DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE SPECTRUM LIE TOTAL WALUES LOGGER MJIEM DISPLAY SETUP window the SPECTRUM VIEW text highlighted 6 2 3 1 Selection of the graphical presentation type VIEW In the VIEW position the EXTENDED FULL and NORMAL texts are available after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons These texts correspond to the slightly different data presented on the display in the graphical presentation modes a a a SPECTRUM VIEW SPE
147. SURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE SOURCE H EST IA SOURCE H EST 1 0 MEASURE TRIGGER windows the EXT I O selection 9 3 2 Digital output function selection of the socket FUNCTION In the FUNCTION it is possible to set the function of the digital output of the instrument s Socket The socket can be used as the source of the trigger pulse TRIG PULSE which starts the measurement in another slave instrument linked to the master one or the alarm signal which appears there after fulfilling certain measurement conditions ALARM PULSE In order to select the function of the digital output the user has to use the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons in the active line with the FUNCTION text The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes made there or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring all changes 1 0 SETUP DIGITAL OUT FUNCTION TRIG PULSE POLARISATION OURC ALARM LEVEL 168 806 EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the FUNCTION selection 9 3 3 Polarisation selection of the digital output signal POLARISATION In the POLARISATION it is possible to select which polarisation of the signal negative or positive will be valid 9 6 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL In order to select the polarisation the user has to use the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons in the active line with the
148. SV 55 pin outs is given in App C The printers with the different connections on the RS 232 socket require the special individual RS 232 RS 232 cable that should fulfil the suitable wire crossing The printers in which the Centronics interface is available instead of the RS 232 one can be connected to the instrument by means of the SV 52 RS 232 Centronics interface The printers which have only USB interface are currently not driven by the instrument A Notice Switch the power off before connecting the instrument to any external device e g a printer or a Personal Computer The REPORT list contains the following elements TITLE that enables the user to give the header to the printed report PRINT RESULTS that enables the user to print out the measurement results on the default printer or to send the measurement result s to a PC using SvanPC software and USB interface PRINT FILE that enables the user to print out on a printer the selected file with the measurement results or to send it to a PC using SvanPC software and USB interface PRINT LOGGER that enables the user to print out on a printer connected directly to the instrument the measurement results in a selected file from the logger or to send it to a PC using SvanPC software and USB interface PRINT USER FILTERS that enables the user to print out on a printer connected directly to the instrument the values of the user filters introduced in the instrument or to
149. T The SAVE is used for storing data in the internal non volatile FLASH DISC memory files are always written at the beginning of a free continuous space as a file see Appendix B for the file formats In order to enter the window the user has to select the SAVE text in the FILE list using the A or push button and press the ENTER push button There are two available functions the SAVE NEXT save a file with the name increased by one and SAVE save a file with the edited name These functions are available after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons SAVE SAVE FILE 630CT FILE 83007 SAWE HEST Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP Press UP to EDIT Press UP to EDIT SAVE window in the FILE list The name of the file in which the measurements results are to be saved is displayed above the SAVE or SAVE NEXT text The default name for a file is displayed in the case of the first entering to this position after power on The default name consists of the day and the month s abbreviation The line of the file s name edition FILE NAME is opened after pressing the lt A gt push button The user skip the file s name edition and start saving file pressing the lt gt push button or return to the FILE list pressing the lt 5 gt one The edition process is presented on the Figure below The displayed inversely charac
150. TER push button on the displayed inversely text the proper sub list is opened containing the values of the coefficients for all SPECTRUM BASED 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE filters It is not possible to change the values The selection of the displayed coefficients in the selected filter is performed by means of the lt A gt v push buttons S1 filter windows 9 16 2 2 Setting the coefficients of the user filters set EDIT The EDIT sub list enables the user to select which filters should be edited the available options are as follows S1 S2 S3 or any other transmitted to the instrument from a PC by means of the interface In order to enter the sub list the user has to select the EDIT text in the SPECTRUM BASED FILTER sub list using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER a SPECTRUM BASED SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS window the EDIT text highlighted The selection of the position in this sub list is performed by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button when the S1 S2 S3 or any other in the EDIT window text is displayed inversely the sub list containing the values of the coefficients for all 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE filters is opened n n EDIT EDIT E W EDIT windows the filter selection The opened window contains the centre frequencies of the filters and their coefficients 2 0 80 Hz avai
151. TER to MOVE b Press EHTER to MOVE RESULT FILES selection to the execution of the MOVE FILES TO USB operation a the RESULT LOGGER and SETUP files selected to the execution of the MOVE FILES TO USB operation b After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the execution of the MOVE FILES TO USB operation is not possible In such case the message is displayed for few seconds and the instruments returns to the FILE list MEASUREMENT PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If the measurements are not performed the instrument starts the operation After the operation Files Moved O K message is presented on the display If the file already exist in the USB memory stick the message with the name of the file and ALREADY EXIST text is presented on the display 7 38 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL n a Da MOVE FILES Files 26JANO Moved ALREADY EXISTS SKIP PRESS ANY KEY Display after the execution of MOVE FILES TO USB operation a and when the file already exists in the USB memory b A Notice After the execution of the MOVE FILES TO USB operation files which have been moved do not exist in the internal instruments memory any more 7 39 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 8 REPORTS PRINTING REPORT The printed reports of the vibration measurement results
152. TIONS OPTIONS OPTIONS FORMAT _Ad FORMAT FORMAT A4 EJECT P EE r ampt EJECT OPTIONS windows the selection of the paper ejection The request is displayed after the printing of the measurement results the statistics of the results the contents of the selected file the contents of the selected file in the logger and the catalogue of the files PRINT RESULTS PRINT FILE PRINT LOGGER PRINT USER FILTERS PRINT CATALOGUE if the Prompt parameter was selected in the EJECT P position of the OPTIONS sub list The user has to answer in this case if the paper in the printer has to be ejected to the new page The change of the available answers is possible after pressing the lt lt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the REPORT list is performed after pressing the ENTER push button with the possible ejection of the paper to the new page oa PRINTING PRINTING ii aaa mm Displays with the request for the confirmation of the paper ejection The message about the time limit is displayed in the case when the printer is not connected or there is any other reason that it does not eject a paper The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt one and after pressing a push button it returns to the REPORT list EJECT PAGE TIME OUT PRESS ANY KEY Display after a printing when there is not possible to eject a paper 8 1
153. TIVITY BY SENSITIVITY SEHSITIUIT CAL FACTOR C 6 0246 SEMSITIVITY CAL FACTOR C 0 0046 a b Displays during setting the sensitivity lower than 10 0 mV ms a and after pressing the lt ENTER gt push button with the calibration factor calculated b The lowest applicable value of the sensitivity to be introduced is equal to 10 0 uV ms it conforms to the calibration factor equal to 60 0 dB and the highest one 10 0 V ms calibration factor equal to 60 0 dB In order to return to the CALIBRATION sub list the user has to press the lt ESC gt push button a a BY SENSITIVITY BY SENSITIVITY Displays with the lowest possible sensitivity and the highest calibration factor a and the highest sensitivity and the lowest calibration factor b A Note The calibration factor is always added to the results in the VIBRATION LEVEL METER mode VLM 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and the FFT analysis modes 4 3 2 The calibration BY MEASUREMENT in the case of vibration signal The calibration by measurements can be conducted in the following way 1 Select the calibration by measurement highlight the BY MEASUREMENT text from the CALIBRATION sub list and press the lt ENTER gt push button oa oa oa CALIBRATION BY MEASUREMENT MEASUREMENT BY SENSITIVITY CAL LEVEL CAL LEVEL BY MEASUREMENT 16 8 mis A Ade LAST CRLIBRHTIUH TEDS Displays with the selected calibration mode and after entering this m
154. TOR 1 LOGGER PEAK LOGGER LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS PROFILE 1 windows the selection of the R1 R2 R3 weighting filter PROFILEC1 PROFILE FILTER DETECTOR 1 L GGER L GGER P P LOGGER MAK LOGGER RMS The characteristics of the filters are given in App D The selection of the required filter is made with the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The user can enter the FILTER line in the PROFILE x sub list pressing the A v push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and it is closed The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made in the sub list is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button 5 3 2 RMS detector selection DETECTOR In the instrument the following RMS detectors are available 100ms 125ms 200ms 500ms 1 0s 2 05 5 05 10 05 The selection of the required detector is made with the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The user can enter the DETECTOR line in the PROFILE x sub list pressing the lt A gt v push buttons After 5 9 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL pressing the ENTER push button any changes made in the sub list are confirmed and it is closed The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made the sub list is made after pressing the lt 5 gt push button a a a a PROFILE i gt PROFILE i gt PROFILE i gt PROFILE i gt FILTER HP1 r HPL r HPL ____
155. TY positions path MENU FUNCTION CALIBRATION BY SENSITIVITY not accessible erre er de ENTRE TREES 4 3 Displays during setting the sensitivity higher than 10 0 mV ms a and after pressing the ENTER push button with the calibration factor calculated 5 2 1 1 2 1 24 00440000000000000000000000000000000000000000 4 3 Displays during setting the sensitivity lower than 10 0 mV ms a and after pressing the ENTER push button with the calibration factor calculated b ccccccccccccessesececececsesssececececsesesecesececeesesaaeseecesesensaseeeees 4 4 Displays with the lowest possible sensitivity and the highest calibration factor a and the highest sensitivity and the lowest calibration factor D a a ae uquy 4 4 Displays with the selected calibration mode and after entering this 4 4 Displays while the instrument is waiting for the calibration measurement to commence eee 4 5 Displays during the calibration measurements nn nennen 4 5 Displays after the calibration 4 5 Displays after pressing the ENTER push button after calculation of the calibration factor value 4 6 Displays in the CALIBRATION window the LAST CALIBRATION text selected a the L
156. USER MANUAL 9 14 Programming the instrument s internal timer TIMER The TIMER enables one to programme the internal timer The instrument can be switched on by itself in the programmed time and it can perform the measurements using the setup which was used before its switching off The selection of the parameter to be set is performed using the v and the change of its value using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt In order to enter the position the user has to select the TIMER text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one RPM MEASUREMENT RS232 RTC SHIFT MODE SIGHAL GENERATOR SETUP list the TIMER text highlighted displayed inversely 9 14 1 Selecting the mode of the timer function MODE The MODE of the timer function is selected pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons when the MODE text is displayed inversely in the TIMER sub list The timer can be switched off Off switched on only once SINGLE switched on many times regularly REGULAR with the period between two consecutive measurements set in the REPETITION line or switched on up to four times not regularly IRREGULAR in the time set in the TIMEx positions The selected value has to be confirmed by pressing the lt gt push button which causes the simultaneous return to the SETUP list
157. VE MAX SPECT To see the MAX values on the display during the the real time 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis measurement the user has to activate the option in the DISPLAY list oath MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP SPECTRUM VIEW MAX or path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES SPECTRUM 7 2 6 Saving the lowest values in the spectrum SAVE MIN SPECT The SAVE MIN SPECT enables the user to save the lowest values of the INSTANTANEOUS spectra calculated with 100 milliseconds time step in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis which occured during the INTEGR PERIOD set in the INPUT list path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP INTEGR PERIOD The activation or deactivation of the SAVE MIN SPECT is done by pressing the lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button the activation is confirmed The SAVE OPTION sub list is closed ignoring all settings made in it after pressing the lt ESC gt push button SAVE OPTIONS t s E 1 iL 1 T 1 SAVE OPTIONS L iL 1 t 1 CT SAVE CT SAVE SAVE MAX SPECT SAJE MAX SPECT SAVE MIN 5 SAVE SPECT SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the SAVE MIN SPECT To see the MIN values on the display during the real time 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis the user has to activate the option in the DISPLAY list path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP SPECTRUM VIEW MIN with active SPECTRUM mode or path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY M
158. VEL DIL o CAL F it appears as above available values 60 dB 60 dB LOGGER VIEW e VIEW available logger views NORMAL FULL EXTENDED e TIME available time settings for logger REAL TIME AVAILABLE TIME LOGGER VIEW sub list FILE NO number of the files in the instrument s logger containing the results of the measurements LOG FILE name of the viewed logger s file 3 9 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 3 10 RECORDS number of records in the viewed logger s file P 1 settings for logger in PROFILE 1 INPUT list available values PEAK P P MAX RMS P 2 settings for logger in PROFILE 2 INPUT list available values PEAK P P MAX RMS P 3 settings for logger in PROFILE 3 INPUT list available values PEAK P P MAX RMS FREE it informs the user about the size of remaining free memory for logger files AVAILABLE it informs the user about the size of the available memory for logger files SCREEN SETUP sub list CONTRAST it enables the user to select one from twenty one possibilities of the contrast level of the instrument s display BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT available values N or if V is chosen it will cause the self made backlight switching off in the case when the keyboard is not used during the last 30 seconds If it happened the first pressing of any push button switches the backlight on BATTERY it informs the user about the source of powering of the instrument and current power supply voltage available sources
159. a aed LE 7 39 Display in the main list the REPORT text highlighted displayed 8 1 SETUP list with the USB HOST PORT selected and this window with the activated RS232 8 1 SETUP list with the RS232 selected and the exemplary contents of this window 8 1 REPORT St req eno ea nid ene es 8 2 REPORT windows with the TITLE selected 8 3 Displays in the text edition of the report s 22 4 4 4 nennen 8 3 Displays with all available characters seeessseseeseeeeeeeeenenne 8 3 Displays with all available characters rennen eene nennen tren trennen nein enne 8 3 REPORT windows with the PRINT RESULTS 222224 0000 000000000 8 4 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 8 4 Display in the REPORT list the execution of the PRINT 5 5 8 4 Example of the printed results A5 2 22 4 0 ener 8 5 Example of the printed results from the VLM mode A4 format nennen eene 8 6 Displays with the confirmation request of the paper ejection eene enne 8 6 Displays during the results
160. accessed at a time the one which name is highlighted displayed inversely The change of the highlighted line is done after pressing the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons Displays with the highlighted elements of the main list After double pressing of the MENU push button the scrolled list of recently accessed menu items appears on the display The example of this list is presented below Such solution enables one to access the most frequently used lists quickly without the necessity of passing the whole path a a RELEHT ITEMS RECEHT ITEMS m MERSUREMEMT SETUP USB HOST PORT SAVE LOGGER TRIGGER PROFILE 3 SAUE LOGGER TRIGGER Display with the recently accessed menu items after double pressing of the lt MENU gt push button After the selection of the desired list the lt A gt or v push buttons the user has to press the ENTER push button in order to enter it After this new sub lists positions elements or various data specification appear on the display 3 1 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL b TRIGGER SETUP Displays with the main list a and the elements of the INPUT list b Next pressing of the ENTER push button enables one to access mentioned above sub lists MEASUR SETUP START DELAY m is LOGGER 0654 MEASUREMENT SETUP window opened path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP The desired position of a list is accessed after pressing the l
161. activate the RPM Revolution Per Minute measurement option This position does not appear after activation of the function RS232 it enables the user to set the transmission speed and the timeout in the RS232 interface RTC it enables the user to set the Real Time Clock SHIFT MODE it enables the user to set the operating mode of the lt SHIFT gt and the START STOP push buttons SIGNAL GENERATOR it enables the user to activate SIGNAL GENERATOR function TIMER it enables the user to set the Timer function USB HOST PORT it enables the user to select the available functionality of the USB Host port USER FILTERS it enables the user to select and set the correcting values for all real time and 1 1 and 1 3 octave filters VIBRATION UNITS it enables the user to select the vibration units in which the results of the measurements are to be given This position is taken off from the menu in the sound meter and voltage sound mode WARNINGS it enables the user to switch on or off the warnings that can be displayed during the operation of the instrument Pressing the lt SHIFT gt and or lt SHIFT gt and push buttons results in a movement to the first position of the opened list and pressing the lt SHIFT gt and v or lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt results in a movement to the last position of the opened list 9 1 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL In each available position any change is performed by means of the
162. actor after the measurement LAST CALIBRATION it enables the user to view the last calibration records TEDS automatical reading of the transducer parameters by the instrument this function will be available soon NO DATA AVAILABLE message appears on the display 3 3 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION CALIBRATION FUNCTION MODE MEASUREMENT FUNCTION CALIBRATION ENTER CODE SH Insert FUNCTION CALIBRATION BY SENSITIVITY MODE n 3 NSITIUITV MEASUREMENT FUNCTION MODE SITIUITY BANAT MEASUREMENT FUNCTION BY MEASUREMENT COL TERE TH CALIBRATION LAST CALIBRATION TEDS 9 FUNCTIOH CALIBRATION BY MEASUREMENT Bv SENSITIVITY LEUEL LAST CALIBRATION TEDS CALIBRATION CALIBRATIO LAST CALIBRATION Hi librati LAST CALIBRATION or REM 2087 EDS B3 DEC 2006 24 NOU 2886 08 CALIBRATION BY SENSITIVITY HO DATA AVAILABLE BY MEASUREMENT mii ALIBRATION Control diagram of the FUNCTION list INPUT one of the main lists available after pressing the lt MENU gt push button gt MEASUREMENT SETUP sub list START DELAY available values of the delay before starting the execution of the measurements 1s 60s NTEGR PERIOD available values of the integration time Inf 1s 24h CYCLE available values for the measurement cycles which ha
163. ain list the DISPLAY text highlighted displayed inversely sees 6 1 Display with the DISPLAY Dist cete Oe te beer o ter eere Eb Seen Ege ER Lee tb dene 6 1 DISPLAY MODES windows in VM nene nennen nest eren 6 2 Display in the LOGGER mode when there is nothing in the logger to be displayed after setting LOGGER as LM ERN 6 2 Measurement results in VM presented in one profile mode sse nennen 6 3 Measurement results in VM and unknow profile presented with the biggest fonts in one profile mode 6 3 Displays during the measurement performed VM with the active LOGGER an envelope icon 6 4 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL DISPLAY MODES windows SPECTRUM position accessible 6 4 Displays in SPECTRUM mode for 1 1 OCTAVE a 1 3 OCTAVE b and FFT 2 2220400121 6 4 Setting on and off the accessibility of three profiles presentation 6 5 Measurement results in 3 PROFILES mode eeri oreore eE E rE nent nennen rennen enne 6 5 Results in 3 PROFILES mode selection of the result in a profile n eene 6 5 Results in 3 PROFILES mode selection of the 1 2 22222 4 0 00 00000 rennen enne terns 6 5 Displays during the measurement pe
164. all files are moved to the continuous space In order to illustrate it let us consider the removing from the memory the setup file named SETS3 After this only the TOTAL AVAILABLE is increased path MENU FILE FREE SPACE 7 20 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL e ss NEN DATE 2 PPF 2887 TIME 14 45 34 PRESS ANY KEY a a a a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE mi TOTAL AWAILABLE FILES FREE SPACE TOTAL AVAILABLE 158837922 bytes 158356384 bytes 15885792 bytes 15836384 bytes Execution of the SET3 file deletion and its influence on the memory space The displays below illustrates the erasing from the flash memory another file named SET8 the FILES FREE SPACE LOGGER FREE SPACE and LOGGER AVAILABLE remain unchanged while the TOTAL AVAILABLE is increased oa a FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE mI FILES FREE SPACE sere M AD 1586823 1586823 2 6 bytes bytes LOGGER FREE SPACE LOGGER FREE SPACE PRESS ANY 15885792 bytes 15885792 bytes Execution of the SETS8 file deletion and the influence of this process on the memory space 7 5 Removing all files with measurement results from memory DELETE ALL The DELETE ALL is used to remove all files from memory In order to enter the position the user has to select the DELETE ALL text in the FILE list using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pres
165. and MODE sub list opened with ACCELERATION b and VOLTAGE c mode selected essere 3 27 Displays with the FUNCTION list opened MEASUREMENT FUNCTION selected a and MEASUR FUNCTION sub list opened with all available options b c d e f 3 27 Displays during the entering of the access code to a function nn nennen 3 28 Display after the unsuccessful verification of the access code sss 3 28 Scheme of the instrument s memory organisation without the USB HOST seen 3 29 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Scheme of the instrument s memory organisation with the USB HOST and memory stick connected 3 30 Displays with the main list the FUNCTION text selected a and the FUNCTION list opened the MODE selected b the MEASUREMENT FUNCTION selected and the CALIBRATION selected d 4 1 FUNCTION list opened MODE selected and MEASUR FUNCTION sub list opened with all available Ins Mom 4 1 MEASUREMENT FUNCTION windows opened a and the activation of the optional function b 4 2 Displays with the main list the FUNCTION text selected a the FUNCTION list opened the CALIBRATION text selected b rant cae Pee HOD E 4 2 Displays with the selected calibration mode and after entering this mode sse 4 3 Displays with the SENSITIVI
166. ange of the contrast 6 4 2 Automatic switch off of the backlight BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT Taking into account the saving of the internal source of the instrument s power the backlight should be used relatively rare It is possible to set the backlights automatic switch off In the case when this option is set after 30 seconds from pressing any push button the backlight is switched off If it happened the first pressing of any push button would cause the switch on of the backlight The confirmation of the selection is made by pressing the lt gt push button The return without taking into account any change is made after pressing the lt ESC gt push button SCREEN SETUP COHTRAST SCREEN SETUP COMTRAST BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT MERI b SCREEN SETUP windows the BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT active a and not active b 6 5 Checking the state of the internal battery BATTERY The BATTERY enables the user to check the internal battery condition In order to enter the window one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed BATTERY text of the DISPLAY list The BATTERY window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY list after pressing the lt 5 gt or the ENTER push button oa DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY SETUP LOGGER MIEM SCREEN SETUP H M LIHIT LABEL DISPLAY list the BATTERY text highlighted The instrument can be
167. asks for the code TEPE CURRENT MICROPHONE REFEREHCE LEWELS REMOTE RMS INTEGRATION SETUP list the RPM MEASUREMENT text highlighted displayed inversely URLID CODE a ENTER CODE ENTER CODE E 1234113 SH Delete SH Insert SHi Delete 5H Insert PRESS ANY KEY Displays during the entering of the access code to a function IHPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 INPUT list after activation of the RPM MEASUREMENT function 9 10 Setting the parameters of the serial interface RS232 The RS232 enables the user to programme the RS 232 interface transmission speed BAUD RATE and to set the time limit before which the interface operation should be performed TIME OUT In order to enter the position the user has to select the RS232 text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER SETUP IEPE CURRENT REFERENCE LEVELS REMOTE RMS INTEGRATION RPM MEASUREMEHT SETUP list the RS232 text highlighted displayed inversely 9 10 1 Setting the transmission speed of the serial interface BAUD RATE The RS 232 interface transmission BAUD RATE speed can be selected from the following available values 1200 bits second 2400 bits s 4800 bits s 9600 bits s 19200 bits s 38000 bits s 57600 bits
168. asurements while the triggering condition is not fulfilled 5 12 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the SLOPE modes selected 5 13 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL modes selected essere 5 13 MEASURE TRIGGER window with the GRAD mode selected eese 5 13 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with not active SOURCE signal line 5 13 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the SOURCE signal 1 5 14 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the SLOPE mode esee 5 14 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the SLOPE mode 10 dB step down 5 14 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the LEVEL mode 1 dB step up 5 14 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the GRAD mode 1 dB step down 5 15 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the GRADIENT selection 1 dB ms and 10 dB ms step up 5 15 LOGGER SETUP windows trigger mode selection sees nennen nennen eene 5 16 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the not active SOURCE signal line sese 5 16 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection 1 dB step 5 16 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection 1 dB step up 5 16 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL s
169. ble after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the REPORT list is performed after pressing the ENTER push button with the possible ejection of the paper to the new page PRINTING PRINTING m num ium Displays with the confirmation request of the paper ejection The similar message is displayed after sending out the statistics of the results the contents of the selected file the contents of the selected file in the logger and the catalogue of the files PRINT STATISTICS PRINT FILE PRINT LOGGER PRINT USER FILTERS and PRINT CATALOGUE The message about the time limit is displayed in the case when the printer or a PC is not connected or there is any other reason that it does not receive the data The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the REPORT list Another message is presented and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user in the case when there is no data to be printed PRINT RESULTS TIME OUT PRESS ANY b PRESS ANY KEW PRINT RESULTS Ho results a Displays during the results printing when there is no transfer a and no data b 8 3 Printing of the measurement results from the selected file PRINT FILE The PRINT FILE enables the user to print out on a printer connected directly to the instrument the s
170. buttons If this option is not active after pressing these push buttons the SAVE window is accessed if the measurements are not performed If the option is active V after pressing the ENTER and ALT push buttons the results are saved in the file with the automatically incremented name and the proper message is displayed for a few seconds The proper setting of the DIRECT SAVE is done by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons 7 10 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the DIRECT SAVE After pressing the ENTER push button the selections made in any position of the sub list in particular also in the DIRECT SAVE are confirmed and the sub list is closed In the case when the AUTO SAVE was active after pressing the ENTER push button the FILE NAME window is opened for editing the names for the AUTO SAVE files The SAVE OPTION sub list is closed ignoring all settings made in it after pressing the ESC push button During the execution of the measurements pressing the ENTER and ALT push buttons causes disregarding the option set in the DIRECT SAVE that the message presented below is displayed MEASUREMENT PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress The presented below displays illustrates the difference in the user interface execution after pressing the lt ENTER gt and lt ALT gt push
171. buttons and pressing the ENTER one The RPM consists of three positions RPM PULSE ROTATION and UNIT The RPM window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt 5 gt push button IHPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 RPM selected in the INPUT list and the RPM window opened 5 25 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 5 8 1 Switching on the RPM measurement RPM The placing a special character N in the line with RPM text enables the RPM function The selection is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation of the activation requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The ENVELOPING window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt 5 gt push button RPM window the RPM selection 5 8 2 Selecting the number of pulses rotations PULSE ROTATION The PULSE ROTATION enables the user to select the number of pulses rotations Available values are as follows 1 2 360 The required parameter can be set by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons with the step equal to 1 or by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one with the step equal to 10 The confirmation of the change made in the position requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window
172. can be increased to 10 nms pressing the lt SHIFT gt with the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons 9 9 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL In order to confirm the setting the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing the lt ESC gt push button the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored a L a REFERENCE LEUELS RFEFEREHCE LEUELS LEVELS ACC 1 meg ACC 1 umis UEL UEL BIL 1 pm BIL 1 pm ACC 1 umis UEL BIL 1 pm REFERENCE LEVEL windows setting the reference level of velocity signal 9 6 3 Setting the reference level of the displacement signal DIL In the DIL position the user can set the reference level of the displacement signal It is possible to set this level from 1 pm to 100 pm with 1 pm step pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The step can be increased to 10 pm pressing the lt SHIFT gt with the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the setting the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing the ESC push button the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored a a a REFERENCE LEUELS EEFEREHCE LEUELS FEFEREHCE LEVELS ACC 1 umis MEL 1 DIL 221 ACC 1 umis d nms UEL 1 nm z DIL L EZS REFERENCE LEVELS windows setting the refe
173. character in the edited name 7 31 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL One can select the proper position of the character in the edited text using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons SAVE SETUP FILE SAVE SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE HRME LEN MET SAVE FILE NEU MET FILE _ SAVE SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP SHirDelete SH Insert Delete SH Insert Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIP SH Delete SH Insert 1 SH Insert Display during the selection of the character s position to be edited The available ASCII characters can be changed using the A or v push button pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one The subsequent digits underline big letters and space appear on the display in the inversely displayed position after each pressing of the mentioned above push buttons SAVE SETUP FILE SRUE SAVE SETUP FILE SAUE SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE MET FILE MET SAUE SALE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Fress ESC to SKIF Fress ESC to SKIF S5H Delete 5H z Inzert 5Hz Delete Insert Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Fress ESC to SKIF Fress ESC to SKIF S5H Delete 5H Inzert 5H Delete Insert
174. confirmed in the case of pressing the lt 5 gt push button but the window is closed REMOTE COMMUNICATION RMS INTEGRATION RPM MERSUREMEHT RS232 RTC SETUP list the SHIFT MODE text highlighted displayed inversely 9 12 1 lt SHIFT gt ALT push button working mode selection SHIFT In the SHIFT the user can choose between 2nd Fun and Shift When the Shift text is selected the lt SHIFT gt and lt ALT gt push buttons operates as in the keyboard of a computer in order to achieve the desired result the second push button has to be pressed in conjunction with the lt SHIFT gt lt ALT gt one When the 2nd Fun text is selected the lt SHIFT gt lt ALT gt push button operates in the sequence with the other one In order to select a desired mode of the lt SHIFT gt push button the lt lt gt lt gt gt should be pressed In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes 9 14 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL the sub list After pressing the lt ESC gt push button the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored oa oa SHIFT MODE SHIFT MODE SHIFT SHIFT ST SP Hormal ST SP Hormal SHIFT MODE windows the available SHIFT settings 9 12 2 START STOP gt push button working mode selection ST SP In the ST SP the user can choose between Normal and Inverse When the Normal text is selected
175. d DELETE DELETE ALL PRESS ANY KEY PRESS ANY 5 ANY KEY DEF RAGMENTAT IDH Displays after the execution of the LOAD operation The contents of the loaded file is displayed in the available result presentation modes after pressing the lt A gt v push buttons depending on the current settings of the instrument FILE EET 1759 SAVE FILE gt ENTER GRESi A KEY AUE OPTIONS 1 1 OCTAVE DUrIBR 1 lt iud Loaded D K B gt Log FILE DELETE DATE 17 AUG 2887 DELETE RLL 17 59 02 PRESS ANY KEV RHS 1 85 LEN 30 30 4 amis RMS 25 4mmse 2 Prafileci E si PA EA 1 File BRES1 L 9 1z2mm selF 1 6GHz Exemplary displays during the loading and checking the contents of a 1 1 OCTAVE file 7 14 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 7 4 Removing a file with the measurement results from memory DELETE The DELETE is used to remove a file from memory In order to enter the window the user has to select the DELETE text to display it inversely using the A v push buttons and then press the lt ENTER gt one SAE er SAVE OPTIOHS LOAD DELETE ALL DEFRRGHEHTRT LOM FILE list with the DELETE text highlighted displayed inversely In the DELETE window there are three elements RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES and SETUP FILES In order to enter the selected sub list the user has to select the
176. e ENTER one FILE DELETE RLL DEFRRGHEHTRTIGOH CATALOGUE SAUE SETUP L RD SETUP FREE SPACE text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE list The files memory in the instrument is divided into two separate parts One part is dedicated for saving the result and setup files and its size is equal to 16252428 bytes The second part is used for saving the logger files and its size is equal to 15859224 bytes The FREE SPACE window in the instrument after the execution of the DELETE ALL operation is presented below a oa FREE SPACE FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE ei TOTAL AWAILABLE 16252428 butez FREE SPACE window after the execution of the DELETE ALL operation The FREE SPACE window contains four numbers First two named FILES FREE SPACE and TOTAL AVAILABLE characterize the result and setup files memory The files are always saved starting from the beginning of the continuous memory space The size in bytes of this space is given in the FILES FREE SPACE position If the result and setup files were not deleted from the memory the number of bytes displayed in the TOTAL AVAILABLE position is the same as in the FILES FREE SPACE However if some of them were deleted assuming that they were not the last saved the memory used by them is empty but it does not increase the continuous space such case the number given in the TOTAL AVAILABLE position is greater than that in the FILES FREE SPACE The DEFRAGMENTAT
177. e ESC one is pushed the selection is ignored and the FFT sub list is closed FFT FFT AVERAGING LINEAR AVERAGING LINEAR FILTER 2 FILTER 2 22 4kHz BAND 22 4kHz BRHD 22 MIMDOM HRHHIHG MIMDOM HRHHIHG 1920 1920 LOGGER LOGGER A FFT window the LOGGER activation 5 6 Selection of 1 1 octave and 1 3 octave spectrum parameters SPECTRUM The SPECTRUM appears in the INPUT list when the 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE function is selected in the MEASUREMENT FUNCTION path FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE This sub list is opened after the selection of the SPECTRUM text from the INPUT list by means of the A v or lt gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER The SPECTRUM consists of the parameters which influence the calculation and logging the results of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis FILTER BAND and LOGGER The SPECTRUM window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button 5 22 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL INPUT SPECTRUM MEASUREMENT RENGE FILTER PROFILE 1 gt ENTER gt PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 LOGGER SPECTRUM selected in the INPUT list and the SPECTRUM window opened 5 6 1 Selecting the weighting filter during 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis FILTER During 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis only Z filter type 1 according to the IEC 61672 1
178. e lt gt push button The instrument requests the confirmation of the operation The next pressing of the lt gt push button when the NO option is selected causes the closing of the window and the return to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list The selection of the NO or YES option is possible using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button 7 25 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL FILES DEFRHGHM FILES DEFERGH Are uou Hre uou sure sure Confirmation windows during the execution of the FILES DEFRAGMENTATION operation After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is not possible In such case the message is displayed and after few seconds instrument returns to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list MEASUREMENT PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If the measurements not performed after pressing the ENTER push button on the active YES option the instrument checks whether the used result and setup files memory is continuous or not If this memory is continuous the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is not executed and the special message is displayed The instrument waits for the reaction of the user
179. e USB disk USB DISK FREE SP In order to switch on the displaying of the message the user has to place by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the special character in the warning s position The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of a change made in the position or ESC push button ignoring a change made in the position HARNINGS HARNINGS RESULTS SAVED CIP RESULTS HOT SAVED CI USB DISK FREE SP USE DISK FREE SF FREE SPACE 2 FREE SPACE 32MB WARNINGS windows USB DISK FREE SP selected 9 18 3 Minimum USB disk memory free space setting MIN FREE SPACE In this line the user can determine the amount of the USB disk memory free space Ll a HARNINGS HARNINGS HARNINGS RESULTS SAVED I 1 RESULTS SRUED C JP RESULTS NOT SAVED USB DISK FREE SP 4 1052 DISK FREE SP 21 USE DISK F FREE SPACE FREE SPACE 1 FREE SPACE WARNINGS windows MIN FREE SPACE selection 9 28 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The selected limit has to be within the range 1 MB 1024 MB If the available memory is not greater than that limit the warning will be displayed The limit is set by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons with the step equal to one MB The step is increased up to ten MB pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt pu
180. e VIBRATION UNITS text highlighted displayed inversely eese 9 27 VIBRATION UNITS windows with the available positions essere nennen 9 27 SETUP list the WARNINGS text highlighted displayed inversely esee 9 27 WARNINGS windows RESULTS NOT SAVED selected eese nennen nennen 9 28 Displays with LAST RESULTS NOT SAVE warning eese 9 28 WARNINGS windows USB DISK FREE SP 1 9 28 WARNINGS windows MIN FREE SPACE selection ccccsessscccececsessceceeececsesnsaeceecceceecssaeeeeececeesseasseeeceeseneas 9 28 Display with USB DISK FREE SPACE warning nennen nennen rennen tenete 9 29 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 1 INTRODUCTION The SVAN 956 is digital Type 1 vibration level meter along with analyser The instrument is intended to general vibration measurements machinery condition monitoring occupational health and safety monitoring It can be used by consutants maintenance services and industry R amp D departments etc Instrument provides parallel acceleration velocity displacement measurements Three vibration profiles allow parallel measurements with independently defined filters and RMS detector time constants Each profile provides significant number of results like RMS PEAK Peak Peak VDV MTVV or Max Advanced time history logging for each profile provides com
181. e automatically the file s name the only possibility is to edit new base file name A Notice The files can be overwritten the use of the same file name without any warning if the REPLACE option is switched on path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS REPLACE a SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE METS FILE SAVE HEAT LEU SAVE HEAT LEV_MET Saved D K ES d Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC ta SKIP Press ESC ta SKIP Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEW Displays in the simplified edition of the file name saving and the saturation of that operation As it was already written the instrument attempts to save a file after pressing the ENTER push button The saving is not possible in the case when the instrument is measuring the signal The special message is displayed for about 3 seconds in this case and the instrument returns to the SAVE SETUP window 7 33 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL MEASUREMENT PROGRESS SAVE SETUP FILE HAME LEU Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Press UP to EDIT Displays after the attempt to perform unavailable saving operation the return to the SAVE SETUP A Notice During the execution of the SAVE or SAVE NEXT function an additional window is displayed informing about the operation performed This window can be unnoticed
182. e case of ANALOG OUT selection there are two options DIRECT and D A Digital Analog To select the option the user has to place a special character in the line with the option s name using lt lt gt lt gt gt and A v push buttons In the case of D A option the SOURCE position appears on the display The available sources are as follows A 2 R1 R2 R3 1 Hz 2 Hz 20kHz The selection of the SOURCE is made by means of lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing lt ENTER gt a L SETUP EXT SETUP I SETUP TEN MODE ANALOG OUT Mo ANALOG OUT p DIRERT OL CT 1 EXTERNAL SETUP windows D A selection 9 5 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL I O SETUP I SETUP I SETUP I SETUP ANALOG OUT ANALOG OUT ANALOG OUT z OUT J oa 1 0 SETUP 1 0 SETUP I SETUP ANALOG OUT ANALOG OUT ANALOG OUT C CT CT C L I O SETUP I SETUP Anm og OUT PIER OUT EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the source selection for D A option In the case of DIGITAL IN selection the signal appearing on the I O socket will be treated as the external trigger if the is chosen path MENU INPUT TRIGGER SETUP MEASURE TRIGGER SOURCE EXT 1 0 and it can be set only if SLOPE or SLOPE was set as TRIGGER path MENU INPUT TRIGGER SETUP MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER oa MEA
183. e icons line there are the following data the function name RMS VDV OVL PEAK P MTVV the detector time constant 100 ms 125 ms 10 0 s when the detector is exponential or Lin when the detector is linear and the weighted filter HP1 HP3 HP10 Vel1 Vel3 Vel10 VelMF Dil1 Dil3 Dil10 KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb R1 R2 R3 The real time clock time of the measurement are presented on the right side of the bottom 2 82 ms RMS 912 mmis m Profilecia Displays in one profile a and 3 PROFILES display mode b with the VLM measurement results 1 65 3 89 mis The results of the measurements be presented in one profile in 3 PROFILES and LOGGER these are the available display modes set by the producer cf path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES It is also possible to activate FILE INFO display mode path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES FILE INFO It is possible to change the display mode pressing the A or v push buttons together with the lt SHIFT gt one In so called 3 PROFILES display mode the results of the measurement from all profiles are displayed simultaneously The units weighted filter and detector time constant are also shown The default settings set up by the producer for the profiles are as follows 3 23 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL PROFILE 1 HP1 weighting filter FILTER HP1 1 0s type of the RMS detect
184. e instrument can also be used for the long term acoustic monitoring using for this purpose the huge logger in which the measurement results are stored The required function is selected by placing the special character in the line with the proper text The position of the character can be changed using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After placing the character in the line with the function s name the user has to press the ENTER push button which closes the MEASUR FUNCTION sub list A Notice It is not possible to change the measurement function during the measurements The instrument displays in this case for about 3 seconds the text MEASUREMENT IN PROGRESS In order to change the mode of the instrument the measurement must be finished 4 3Instrument s calibration CALIBRATION The instrument is factory calibrated with the supplied microphone for the standard environmental conditions Because the microphone sensitivity is a function of the temperature ambient pressure and humidity when the absolute sound pressure level value is important the calibration of the measurement channel has to be done In order to select a calibration function the user has to enter the CALIBRATION sub list to select the CALIBRATION text using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one when this text is displayed inversely The CALIBRATION sub list consists
185. e integration period INTEGR PERIOD The INTEGR PERIOD defines the period in which the signal is being averaged during the measurements The definitions of the measurement results in which the integration period is used is given in App D The required value of this parameter can be set by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt and confirmed by the ENTER push button The integration period INTEGR PERIOD can be set by pressing the lt gt gt or lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button From 1 s to 59 s with 1 second or 10 seconds step MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP START DELAY START DELAY o 15 START DELAY gt E S IHTEGE PERIOD IHTEGR PERIOD IHTEGE PERIOD REP CYCLE Inf CYCLE CYCLE Inf L GGER 1 OFF g OFF START DELAY START DELAY ls START DELAY lt SHIFT gt lt gt gt MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the INTEGR PERIOD with 10 seconds step From 1 m min to 59 m with 1 minute or 10 minutes step oa ao HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP START DELAY D DL START DELAY 15 START DELAY OFF MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the INTEGR PERIOD with 1 and 10 minutes step From 1 h to 24 h with 1 hour or 10 hours step It is also possible to set Inf value HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP START DELAY dis sTRRT DELAY ds
186. e reactions of the instrument on the pressing of these push buttons will be described in details in the following chapters Markers The Markers enable the user to mark special events which occurred during the performed measurements i e the airplane flight the dog s barking the train s drive etc The logger has to be switched on path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LOGGER On in order to activate the markers and one or more logger options LOGGER PEAK LOGGER P P LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS in profiles have to be chosen path MENU INPUT PROFILE x In order to enter the marker the user must press lt SHIFT gt and ALT push buttons simultaneously during the measurement The ENTER MARKER window opens and there are four available marker numbers To choose marker number 1 the user must press lt A gt push button number 2 number 3 lt gt gt and number 4 lt gt The ENTER MARKER window closes automatically and chosen marker is activated after pressing lt SHIFT gt lt ALT gt again active marker number will be highlighted In order to switch off the marker the user has to open the ENTER MARKER window and press this push button which refers to the marker to be switched off The current state of the markers is indicated in the logger s file cf App B for details and can be used to show them using dedicated presentation software oOo ow ENTER MARKER 2 4 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Display with the M
187. e the name edition in the DIR NAME line The default name consists of the day number and the month abbreviation The not existing directory will be created e the selection of the existing directory by means of the lt gt gt push buttons pressed in the line with the DIR NO text The name of the selected directory is displayed in the DIR NAME line The selection is confirmed after pressing the ENTER push button which closes the window and returns to the FILE list The return to this list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the 9 20 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL selection is not confirmed The selection of the directory is obligatory during the initialisation process In this case also the lt 5 gt push button confirms the settings DIRECTORY DIRECTORY DIRECTORY DIRECTORY FREE SPACE 62977 KB FREE SPACE 62992 KB FREE SPACE 62997 KB Please wait Counting files Edit directory name Edit directory name SH Delete 5H z Insert 5Hz Delete S5H Insert S5elect directory Contents of the DIRECTORY window DIR HO 2 DIR HO 72 IR HO DIR HAME 17 DIR 17 DIR 11JHH In the case of the TIMER function the directory selection is skipped and the default one is created The usage of the USB disk modifies a few windows and lists First of all the described above DIRECTORY window and COPY FILES TO USB MOVE FILES TO USB windows appear
188. e true RMS value of the measured signal When this option is selected the value of the RMS function do not depend on the detector time constant 100ms 125ms 200ms 500ms 1 0s 2 0s 5 0s 10 0s In this case the indicator Lin or L is displayed in the different modes of the result presentation Setting EXPONENTIAL enables the user to fulfil the requirements of another standard for the RMS measurements When this option is selected the value of the RMS function depends on the detector time constant the results are displayed with the indicator of the detectors selected in the profiles path MENU INPUT PROFILE x DETECTOR 100ms 125ms 200ms 500ms 1 0s 2 0s 5 0s 10 0s SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 9 9 Activation of RPM measurement function RPM MEASUREMENT The RPM MEASUREMENT RPM Revolutions Per Minute position enables the user to activate the RPM measurement function which is not included in the standard set of the instrument It can be bought together with the instrument or can be purchased by the user in the future In the latter case after selecting the RPM MEASUREMENT text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing ENTER the user has to introduce special code for activation of the function After successful activation the RPM MEASUREMENT this text does not appear on the SETUP list any more RMP position appears then in the INPUT list and the instrument never more
189. ed file from the VIBRATION LEVEL METER mode format A5 8 4 Printing of the logger results PRINT LOGGER The PRINT LOGGER enables the user to print out on a printer connected directly to the instrument the measurement results in a selected file from the logger or to send them to a PC using SvanPC software and USB interface In order to enter the position the user has to select the PRINT LOGGER text 8 8 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL in the REPORT list using the A v lt lt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER This option is under development Function not available text appears on the display FRIHT USER FILTERS PRINT CATALOGUE REPORT windows with the PRINT LOGGER selected D a Function Hot available PRESS ANY KEW PRINT LOGGER window opened Function not available message 8 5 Printing of the coefficients of the user filters PRINT USER FILTERS The PRINT USER FILTERS enables the user to print out the values of the user filters introduced in the instrument 61 52 S3 REPORT windows with the PRINT USER FILTERS selected In order to enter the position the user has to select the PRINT USER FILTERS text in the REPORT list using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER After pressing the lt gt push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements performed the printing
190. ed in the logger can be presented in three different modes which differ slightly each other These modes are changed after pressing the lt ALT gt and or the ALT and lt v gt push buttons or they can be set in the VIEW path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP LOGGER VIEW VIEW 6 6 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Exemplary displays with the measurement results saved in the logger 6 1 4 Setting on off the view of the file description FILE INFO The possibility of the additional file description presented on the instrument s display can be switched on or off placing or replacing the special character in the displayed inversely line with the FILE INFO text by means of the lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the ENTER push button This confirmation closes also the DISPLAY MODES sub list The sub list can be also closed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the settings made there are ignored a a DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY MODES SPECTRUM C SPECTRUM 3 PROFILES 4 3 PROFILES LOGGER vl LOGGER FILE IMFO FILE INFO Setting on and off the file description presentation mode In the FILE INFO window the file name its size date and time of the registration of the main results cf App B and time so called ELAPSED TIME during which the main results saved in the logger were measured The value presented there belongs to the range 1 INTEGRATION PERIOD a
191. eference level of the displacement signal DIL 9 7 Parameters of remote communication REMOTE COMMUNICATION 9 7 1 Selecting the type of remote communication TYPE 9 7 2 Setting the packet size of the remote communication PACKET 9 8 Detector s type selection in the RMS calculations RMS INTEGRATION 9 9 Activation of RPM measurement function RPM MEASUREMENT 9 10 Setting the parameters of the serial interface RS232 9 10 1Setting the transmission speed of the serial interface BAUD RATE 9 10 2Setting time limit for the performance of serial interface operation TIME OUT 9 11 Programming the instruments internal Real Time Clock RTC 9 12 Selection of few push buttons mode SHIFT MODE 9 12 1 SHIFT ALT push button working mode selection SHIFT 9 12 2 lt START STOP push button working mode selection ST SP 9 13 Activation of the signal generation option SIGNAL GENERATOR 9 14 Programming the instrument s internal timer TIMER 9 14 1Selecting the mode of the timer function MODE 9 14 2Setting day of the instrument s switch on START DAY 9 14 3Setting hour of the instrument s switch on START HOUR 9 14 4Selecting the start hours for four irregular automatic measurements TIMEx 9 14 5Selecting the period between two consecutive measurements REPETITION 9 14 6Description of the exemplary timer function execution 9 15 Selection the USB HOST port functionality USB HOST PORT 9 16 Setting the coefficients of the user filters USER
192. eim evite edet 9 2 SETUP list the LANGUAGE text highlighted displayed 1 1 9 2 Language windows with all available languages seeeeseseeeeeenereneeneenen nennen nennen ener enne eene 9 2 Displays with the English version of the user interface sssssssseseseeeeeeeeen nennen nennen ener nnne 9 2 Displays with the Italian version of the user interface nennen nennen een eene ener tenes 9 2 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Displays with the Polish version of the user Interface eene eene nennen tree 9 3 Displays with the Hungarian version of the user 1 ener een rennen 9 3 Displays with the Flemish version of the user interface nennen nennen nenne 9 3 Displays with the French version of the user interface nn neret tnnt 9 3 Displays with the Spanish version of the user interface 9 3 Displays with the German version of the user 1 ener nennen nenne 9 3 Displays with the Turkish version of the user interface 9 3 Displays during the entering of the access code to the Russian version of the user Interface 9 4 Displays with the Russian version of the user interface available only on some markets
193. elected file with the measurement results or to send it to a PC using SvanPC software and the USB interface In order to enter the position the user has to select the PRINT FILE text in the REPORT ist using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the lt ENTER gt TITLE PRIHT RESULTS PRIHT LOGGER PRIHT USER FILTERS PRINT CATALOGUE ka REPORT windows with the PRINT FILE selected After pressing the lt ENTER gt push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the printing is impossible and the message is displayed 8 6 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL MEASUREMENT PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If no files were saved in the instrument s memory then after pressing ENTER a special message is displayed and the unit waits for the reaction of the user In this time any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and lt ALT gt one and after pressing a push button the instrument returns to the REPORT list Display in the REPORT list the PRINT FILE position when no files were saved In the consecutive lines of the display the current file number the total number of the files the file name file type date and time of registration are presented The change of the current file with the unit step can be done pressing the lt lt gt
194. election 10 dB step 5 17 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the PRE selection 5 17 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the PRE selection for different LOGGER STEPS sess 5 17 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the POST selection essent nennen rennes 5 18 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the POST selection for different LOGGER 5 18 LOGGER TRIGGER windows with the POST selection for different LOGGER 5 65 22 2 2 2 2 5 18 TRIGGER SETUP window the RECORDER TRIGGER text highlighted esee 5 19 RECORDER TRIGGER windows the TRIGGER selection n nasa 5 19 RECORDER TRIGGER windows the source selection for SLOPE a and SLOPE b 5 19 RECORDER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection level expressed in linear units 1 dB step up a 54 een epp beret e P iere eng 5 20 RECORDER TRIGGER windows with the GRADIENT selection 1 dB step 5 20 RECORDER TRIGGER windows with the GRADIENT selection 10 dB step 5 20 FFT selected in the INPUT list and the FFT window 5 21 FFT window the BAND selection nunata sess 5 21 EFT subhst the WINDOW selection nitet Rie Y e e ax ert e ek
195. entering text i e the name of the file the header for the printed reports from the measurements TITLE 6 HOTELE a TITLE 11 S5H Delete 5H z Insert 5Hz Delete SH Insert Displays during the edition of the text which has to be printed as a header in the measurement reports path MENU REPORT TITLE Below the structure of the elements of the main list is presented The more detailed description of the FUNCTION INPUT DISPLAY FILE REPORT and SETUP lists is given in the following chapters FUNCTION one of the main lists available after pressing the MENU push button gt MODE ACCELERATION available values VOLTAGE available values gt MEASUREMENT FUNCTION sub list LEVEL METER available values 1 1 OCTAVE available values 1 3 OCTAVE available values FFT available values ENVELOPING available values gt CALIBRATION sub list BY SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY available values of sensitivity in mV Pa o 10gV ms 10 ms e CAL FACTOR it displays calculated calibration factor BY MEASUREMENT sub list e CAL LEVEL available values of calibration level o 100mm s 1 km s in the case of vibration measurements or 100 dB 180 dB if the reference level was set to 1 um s and the LOGARITHM scale was selected in the DISPLAY SCALE sub list e CAL FACTOR it displays calculated calibration f
196. er s file LOGGER STEP The LOGGER STEP defines the period of the data logging in a file It can be set from 2ms to 1 s in 1 2 5 sequence the values from 1 second to 59 seconds the values from 1 minute to 59 minute and 1 hour The required parameter can be set by means of the lt gt gt push buttons with the single step and by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt with the incremented one The selection is accepted by the ENTER one which closes simultaneously the MEASUREMENT SETUP window Any changes are ignored after pressing the lt ESC gt push button oa MEASUR SETUP START DELAY oa MEASUR SETUP START DELAY a MEASUR SETUP START DELAY MEASUR SETUP START DELAY IHTEGR PERIOD REP CYCLE LOGGER LOGGER STEP MEASUR SETUP START DELAY oa HERSUR START DELAY 11 5 IMTEGE PERIOD REP CYCLE LOGGER LOGGER STEP LOGGER 10512 SETUP IHTEGR PERIOD HERSUR SETUP START DELAY i HERSUR SETUP LOGGER STEP LOGGER 10512 IHTEGE PERIOD REF CYCLE 2 LOGGER MEASUR SETUP START DELAY oa HERSUR SETUP START DELAY IMTEGE PERIOD REP CYCLE LOGGER LOGGER STEP LOGGER 10512 PERIOD REF CYCLE LOGGER MEASUR SETUP START DELAY HERSUR SETUP START DELAY 11 5 IMTEGE PERIOD REP CYCLE LOGGER LOGGER STEP LOGGER 10512 5
197. er pressing the lt ESC gt push button the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored 9 3 1 Mode selection of the Ext I O port MODE In the MODE it is possible to select the function of the instrument s socket named as Ext I O This socket can be used as e the output of the analogue signal ANALOG OUT transmitted from the input of the instrument to its output without any digital processing i e filtering e the input of the digital signal used as an external trigger to start the measurements DIGITAL IN in the slave instrument the digital output DIGITAL OUT used for triggering other slave instrument from the master one e the source of any alarm signal in the case of certain circumstances occurred during the measurements i e the level of the input signal was higher than selected one The more detailed description of the Ext I O is given in App C To select the mode the user has to use the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons in the line with the MODE text The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes made there or lt 5 gt push buttons ignoring all changes 1 0 SETUP EXT 1 0 SETUP EXT 1 0 SETUP BLS OU OUT MODE Ea MODE M DIBITHL OUT FUMCTION EXT TRIGGER FUHCTIOM TRIG PULSE POLARISATION EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the MODE selection In th
198. er with the Loudspeaker when the measurement is started the trigger is switched on and the level of the signal is too low to start the registration Profileci i3 1528 Display with Antenna Tree icon Loudspeaker icon is displayed when the measurement is started and executed The crossed out loudspeaker means measurement is paused Pause Profilec1 gt i3 Profileci E3 1522 1522 Display with Loudspeaker icon Headphone is displayed when RS 232 SV 55 interface is connected to the instrument Profileci 1528 Display with Headphone icon Envelope icon is presented when the current measurement results are logged in the instrument s logger file Together with this icon the Loudspeaker icon is always displayed In the case when the Envelope icon starts flashing it means that the whole logger memory of the instrument is filled out The new measurement result is not saved in it If the user wants to save these results he has to DELETE some logger files and execute LOGGER DEFRAGMENTATION path MENU FILE DEFRAGMENTATION LOGGER DEFRAGMENTATION 3 25 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Profile 1 gt Display with Envelope icon Bell is displayed when overload has taken place during the last measurement cycle the icon is displayed also after the measurement and after loading the file with the overloaded results Profileci Display with Bell icon
199. ernal instrument s memory to the USB memory stick The proper window is opened after pressing the ENTER push button when the MOVE FILES TO USB text in the FILE list is displayed inversely The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button n ao FILE D a HOWE FILES FREE SPACE RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES iC 1 SETUP FILES DIRECTORY 25 AH b Press EHTER to MOVE SAUE SETUP LOAD SETUP DIRECTORY COPY FILES TO USB a FILE list with the MOVE FILES TO USB text selected a and the MOVE FILES window opened b The MOVE FILES TO USB sub list consists of three positions RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES SETUP FILES and DIRECTORY position with the name of the file in which the files from the internal memory of the instrument will be stored In order to activate required position the user has to place the special character in the line with the RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES or SETUP FILES text using the lt gt gt or v push button After next pressing the ENTER push button when no option is selected the window is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list The return to the FILE list is also possible after pressing the lt 5 gt push button n MOVE FILES RESULT FILES n a MOVE FILES RESULT FILES EF LOGGER FILES 3 1 n a MOVE FILES RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES iD J ETUP FILES DIRECTORY 25JRH a Press ENTER to MOVE UP FILES DIRECTORY 25JAH Press EH
200. ery cover e change the batteries and e reassemble the parts of the instrument The fully charged battery ensures more than 12 hours of the continuous work of the instrument with the backlight off The operation time is decreased about 20 96 with the backlight switched on The battery condition can be checked by means of the POWER SUPPLY function It is also presented continuously on the display by means of the Battery icon al po 25 4mm Po BATTERY 23 ammis Pom RMS 21 402 P AU POS m Profileci Profiled pe EY Displays with the Battery icon a and in the BATTERY window path MENU DISPLAY BATTERY b LOW BATTERY Display with LOW BATTERY message When there is a connection to the USB interface USB Device socket is connected by means of the cable to a PC the Computer icon is presented on the top of the display and in the BATTERY window there is the USB POWER 5 0 V message oa BATTERY USB POWER s u Profileti T Displays with the Computer icon a and in the BATTERY window b A Notice In the case when Battery icon is flashing it is strongly recommended to use as soon as possible the external power adapter or USB interface In the other case the instrument after a while will be switched off by itself 3 22 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The backlight of the display can be activated by means of the lt
201. es step 5 3 MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the INTEGR PERIOD with 10 hours step 5 3 Displays during setting the predefined INTEGR PERIOD sequence sees 5 4 Display when the INT PERIOD is too short for AUTO SAVE ene enne 5 4 REP CYCLE setting with the step equal to 5 4 REP CYCLE setting with the step equal to 20 esses 5 4 Displays with the LOGGER deactivated and activated 5 5 Displays during setting the LOGGER STEP available values in a sequence 1 2 5 sss 5 5 LOGGER STEP setting available values in milliseconds esee enne eene 5 5 LOGGER STEP setting available values from 500 milliseconds to 1 5 6 LOGGER NAME edition in MEASUREMENT 2 204424 4 4 1 0000000000000 netter tene tren nenne 5 6 Displays during the attempt of overwriting the existing file nennen nennen 5 6 Relations between INTEGR PERIOD and LOGGER STEP essere enne tnnt 5 7 INPUT list with the MEASUREMENT RANGE selected eese eren 5 7 MEASUREMENT RANGE windows the RANGE 1 5 8 Displays with change of the default range values caused by the calibration factor sse 5 8 INPUT list with the PROFILE 1
202. esented with different DYNAMIC parameter 6 2 1 3 Scaling the horizontal axis of the graphical presentation X ZOOM The X ZOOM enables the user to change the horizontal axis in the SPECTRUM presentation mode by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the lt gt push button which closes also the DISPLAY SCALE sub list The sub list can be also closed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the settings made there are ignored In 1 1 OCTAVE mode available values are 4x and 5x In 1 3 OCTAVE mode available values are 2x 5x In 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE in spectrum presentation mode the X ZOOM can be changed by pressing SHIFT and lt gt gt push buttons DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE SCALE LIH SCALE LIH SCALE LIH H ZO00M 200M GRID V4 GRID V4 GRID V4 AUTOSCALE vJ AUTOSCALE vJ AUTOSCALE vJ DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE SCALE LIH LIH F 00M BRID J GFID J AUTOSCALE J AUTOSCALE J L 2 29mmistlF 1 aH wumpa 1 3 OCTAVE SPECTRUM m 3x 4x and 5x X ZOOM 6 9 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Displays in FFT SPECTRUM 2x 4x and 5x X ZOOM 6 2 1 4 Switching on off the grid in the graphical mode presentation GRID The GRID enables the user to switch on or off the grid in any graphical presentation placing or replacin
203. ess the lt gt push button on the inversely displayed LOGGER VIEW text of the DISPLAY SETUP sub list The LOGGER VIEW window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY SETUP sub list after pressing the lt ESC gt the settings made there are not confirmed or the lt ENTER gt push button the settings are confirmed DISPLRY DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE LOGGER VIEW SPECTRUM UIEW SPECTRUM TYPE LOGGER WIE DISPLAY SETUP windows the LOGGER VIEW text highlighted 6 2 5 1 Selecting the shape of the graphical presentation VIEW LOGGER VIEW LOGGER VIEW LOGGER VIEW UIEM NORMAL IEW VIEW d EXTENDED TIME REAL TIM TIME Aa TIME TIME REAL TIM LOGGER VIEW windows with the possible values of the VIEW parameter The VIEW enables the user to select the shape of the graphical mode presentation Three different views are available which are called as NORMAL FULL and EXTENDED The selection is made by means of lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER for the confirmation The user achieve the same effect after pressing the ALT and or the ALT and v push buttons Displays with the values of the VIEW parameter 6 2 5 2 Setting the time to be presented TIME oa L1 LOGGER VIEW LOGGER VIEW EXTEHDED EXTEHDED TINE TIME SS LOGGER VIEW windows with the possible values of the TIME parameter 6
204. essary PRESS ANY KEY is displayed when the instruments memory was empty before trial of the defragmentation or when there were no deleted files CATALOGUE it enables the user to verify the list of files in the memory the NO FILES text is displayed in the case when the instrument s memory is empty FREE SPACE it informs the user about the size of the available memory for saving the measurement results in the file FILES FREE SPACE the TOTAL AVAILABLE bytes of the memory the number displayed in the FILES FREE SPACE increased by the memory which was previously used by the deleting files the next two numbers given in the FREE SPACE window named LOGGER FREE SPACE and LOGGER AVAILABLE characterize the logger files memory in the same way SAVE SETUP saves the current settings of the instrument with lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons one can choose between two modes SAVE NEXT and SAVE These are similar to the options available while saving result files The SAVE mode enables to choose the file name manually In the SAVE NEXT mode the file name will be set automatically LOAD SETUP it enables the user to verify the list of setup files in the memory and to load the previously saved settings of the instrument the NO FILES text is displayed in the case when there is no setup files a FILE a n LI TAUG SAVE OPTIONS SAU LOAD DELETE DELETE ALL Press ESC to SKIP DEFRAGMENTAT IOH Press UP to EDIT SAUE LOAD DEL
205. evice In the case the device declares the current consumption greater than 200 mA the dedicated warning is presented In the case the current consumption is greater than 250 mA the connected USB disk is switched off and special warning is displayed In other cases the connected USB disk is initiated and the free space is determined D a USB DISK DIRECTOR 220 mh UERCUREEHT EXCEED POHER USB DISK 4 d USB DISK CAPABILITY DISABLED Please wait 250 mH PRESS ANY KEY PRESS ANY KEY PRESS ANY KEY Counting free space Displays with the different USB disk warnings This operation can last up to few minutes depending on the disk s capacity The detection of the USB DISK is signalised by the paper sheet icon at the display s left corner Next the file s directory should be determined path MENU FILE DIRECTORY This directory can be created in the instrument or already existing one in the disk is selected The FREE SPACE denotes the available free memory on the connected disk The DIR shows the number of the selected directory the 1 number and the number of the existing directories the 2 number In the case the directories do not exist these numbers are equal to zero The DIR NAME enables one to edit the directory name the 1 number or displays its name The help lines are placed at the display s bottom There are two ways of the current directory selection
206. filter windows the TYPE erret Hen eren Pre ere REIR RE EO EE 9 23 filter windows the HFC 3dB selection for a LOWPASS 9 23 filter windows the LFC 3dB selection for a HIGHPASS filter nennen 9 23 filter windows the LFC 3dB selection and the HFC 3dB selection for BANDPASS filter 9 24 USER FILTERS windows SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS selected esee 9 24 SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS window the VIEW text highlighted see 9 25 VIEW windows the filter selection enhe nns setenta than ness esset teda sense eene na 9 25 ST filter Windows 9 25 SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS window the EDIT text highlighted serene 9 25 EDIT windows the filter selection I ener enne 0 9 25 51 filter windows the coefficient selection n n en entente ennt 9 26 SPECTRUM BASED FILTER window the CLEAR position selected eee 9 26 CLEAR windows the selection of the filters to be 9 26 Displays during and after the execution of CLEAR 9 27 SETUP list th
207. g file changing the name and saving data All changes introduced to the setup file name during the edition are ignored after pressing the lt ESC gt push button This pressing causes the return to the list from which the SAVE option was entered The return after the edition to the line with the SAVE or SAVE NEXT text is possible after pressing the v push button The simplified edition consists in the addition at the end of the file name the natural number The increase by one of the number is made automatically After the saving operation execution the new setup file name is displayed and the instrument waits then for a reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or the ALT In the next attempt of saving data the new name is displayed in the FILE NAME line and that name is increased by one during the saving operation SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE SRUE T LEU M1 SAL u Press ENTER to SRUE Saved Saved D K Press ENTER to SAWE Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIP SH Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY Press UP to EDIT PRESS ANY KEY Displays in the simplified edition of the setup file name and saving operation execution The number can be changed from 1 to N The only limitation of the N value is the length of the file name which cannot be longer than 8 characters In the case when such limitation is achieved and the instrument can not chang
208. g the special character in the displayed inversely line with the GRID text by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the ENTER push button This confirmation closes also the DISPLAY SCALE sub list The sub list can be also closed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the settings made there are ignored DISPLAY SCALE DISPLAY SCALE SCALE LIH SCALE LIH F 00M F 00M ix GRID GRID AUTOSCALE AUTOSCALE JJ Displays with the grid switched on and off 6 2 2 Selection of the Spectrum Type in VM SPECTRUM TYPE The SPECTRUM TYPE enables the user to change the spectrum type This sub list contains three positions ACCELERATION VELOCITY and DISPLACEMENT In order to enter this sub list one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed SPECTRUM TYPE text of the DISPLAY SETUP sub list The user can selected the required type of the spectrum presented on the display by means of the lt lt lt gt gt _ push buttons The SPECTRUM TYPE window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY SETUP list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button which ignores any changes in the positions of the sub list or the ENTER push button which confirms the changes DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE SPECTRUM TYPE LOGGER MIEM DISPLAY SETUP window the SPECTRUM TYPE text highlighted 6 10 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL oa
209. ggering o TRIGGER available options SLOPE SLOPE LEVEL LEVEL GRAD o SOURCE available sources are RMS 1 and EXT I O for SLOPE o LEVEL available values 24 136 dB LOGGER TRIGGER it enables the user to switch on or off the triggering in logger o TRIGGER available values LEVEL LEVEL SOURCE RMS 1 LEVEL available values 24 136 dB PRE available values 0 50 for LOGGER STEP equal to 100 ms gt 0 0 5 0 s POST available values 0 200 for LOGGER STEP equal to 100 ms gt 0 0 20 0 s RECORDER TRIGGER it enables the user to switch on or off the trigger of recording TRIGGER available options SLOPE SLOPE LEVEL LEVEL GRAD SOURCE available sources are RMS 1 and EXT I O for SLOPE LEVEL available values 24 136 dB 1 s 10 km s GRADIENT for GRAD available values 1 dB ms 100 dB ms IHPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 Control diagram of the INPUT list in the 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE mode SVAN 956 USER MANUAL a _____ ___ __INPUT____ FUNCTION MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFILE 1 DISPLAY PROFILE 2 FILE PROFILE 3 REPORT SETUP TRIGGER SETUP n n a MENU IHPUT ENUELOP ING FUNCTION MEASUREMENT RANGE IHFUT PROFILE 1 FILTER RE PROFILE 2 z 1 4kHz PROFILE 3 LINES 1600 TRIGGER SETUP a ENVELOPING FILTER 3 15kHz S 6kH
210. gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER The selection of the position in this sub list is performed by means of the lt gt gt push buttons The coefficients of a set or sets are cleared after the selection of the proper text by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and after pressing the ENTER one n CLEAR CLEAR E WT ma CLEAR windows the selection of the filters to be cleared After this the WAIT text appears on the display and the instrument returns to the SPECTRUM BASED window The CLEAR sub list is also closed and the instrument returns to the SPECTRUM BASED window after pressing the lt 5 gt push button without taking any action SPECTRUM BASED VIEW EDIT 9 26 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Displays during and after the execution of CLEAR operation 9 17 Selection of the vibration units VIBRATION UNITS The VIBRATION UNITS position enables the user to select the units for the vibration measurements In order to enter the position the user has to select the VIBRATION UNITS text in the SETUP list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER SETUP SHIFT MODE SIGHAL GEMERATOR USB HOST PORT USER FILTERS WIBRATION UNITS SETUP list the VIBRATION UNITS text highlighted displayed inversely It is possible to select the NON METRIC units e g 9 ips mil etc or METRIC units e g m
211. he DISPLAY list after pressing the lt 5 gt lt ENTER gt push button UNIT LABEL UNIT LABEL UNIT LABEL UNIT LABEL SURHTEK ANALYZER 06 2 S IEC 894 1995 68904 2008 1 IEC 61268 1995 Type 1 IEC 61672 1 2882 IEC 61268 1995 I50 8841 1398 IEC 61672 1 2682 I50 8841 1999 UNIT LABEL windows opened and after scrolling with the lt A gt v push buttons A Notice The contents of the UNIT LABEL should be always transmitted to the Svantek s service in the case of any problems faced by the user during the instrument s operation 6 19 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 7 SAVING THE MEASUREMENT RESULTS FILE The registration of the measurement results is an essential task for the efficient use of the instrument All available measurement results can be stored in the FLASH type memory of the instrument or on the USB memory stick There are two main ways for storing the measurement data in the instrument 1 Save files containing the main results and setup settings using the FILE list 2 Save data in the logger s file A Notice The instrument s logger memory is independent from the results and setup memory The capacity of the available memory is equal 32 MB and is divided between logger 16 252 428 bytes and results and setup settings 15 859 224 bytes A Notice All of the options except DEFRAGMENTATION from the FILE list can be used for the USB
212. he execution of the LOAD SETUP eene nennen tren 7 36 FILE list with the DIRECTORY text selected and the DIRECTORY window opened b 7 36 FILE hist th DIRECTORY windoW erret eter Meter Pe roe e ere Ee 8 7 36 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL FILE list with the COPY FILES TO USB text selected a and the COPY FILES window opened b 7 37 RESULT FILES selection to the execution of the COPY FILES TO USB operation the RESULT LOGGER and SETUP files selected to the execution of the COPY FILES TO USB operation b 7 37 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 37 Display after the execution of COPY FILES TO USB operation and when the file exists already b 7 37 FILE list with the MOVE FILES TO USB text selected and the MOVE FILES window opened b 7 38 RESULT FILES selection to the execution of the MOVE FILES TO USB operation the RESULT LOGGER and SETUP files selected to the execution of the MOVE FILES TO USB operation b 7 38 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 38 Display after the execution of MOVE FILES TO USB operation a and when the file already exists in the USB memory UE EET E leaded Siac en nea ena eens aes na
213. he instrument is developed in the fully conversational way The user can operate the instrument by selecting the proper position from the MENU list Thanks to that the number of the control push buttons of the instrument is reduced to nine 2 1 4 9 m gt P WN H Control push buttons on the front panel On the front panel of the instrument there are located the following control push buttons ENTER MENU lt SAVE gt lt 5 gt CAL PAUSE lt SHIFT gt Markers lt ALT gt Markers lt A gt lt lt gt lt gt gt lt gt START 5 gt The name given in brackets denotes the second push button function which is available after pressing it in conjunction or in sequence with the lt SHIFT gt push button For the first two push buttons the name given in square brackets denotes also the third push button function which is available after pressing it in conjunction or in sequence with the lt ALT gt push button SVAN 956 r Markers L on off SVANTEK Ext Power amp Control push buttons of the SVAN 956 instrument lt SHIFT gt The second function of a push button written in red colour on a push button can be used when the lt SHIFT gt push button is pressed This push button can be used in two different ways e as SHIFT in the keyboard e g while typing the filename both lt SHIFT gt and the
214. hich denotes the Low Frequency Corner and the HFC 3dB of the Rx filter At these frequencies the amplitude of the input signal is attenuated two times The available values of the LFC are from 10 Hz to 10 0 kHz while the HFC the available values are from 100 Hz to 10 00 kHz The selection of the parameter is made by pressing lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressing lt lt gt or lt gt gt push button with the lt SHIFT gt one increases the step 20 times The confirmation is made by pressing ENTER The return to the REAL TIME FILTERS list ignoring any changes made in the sub list is made after pressing the lt 5 gt push button L Ri Ri TYPE BAHDPASS BAHDPASS LFEC3dB LFCC3dB HFCtSdBo 18 88 kHz HFCt3dBo 18 88 kHz Ri Ri TYPE BANDPASS BANDPASS BANDPASS LFCC3dB2 18 6 Hz 110 110 HFECSdB HFCCSaB SPESE HFCCSaB filter windows the LFC 3dB selection and the HFC 3dB selection for BANDPASS filter 9 16 2 Setting filter coefficients for octave analysis SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS The SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS sub list enables the user to introduce the values of the filter coefficients correcting the results of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis The results of the analysis the TOTAL values can be modified by the introduced factors In order to enter the sub list the user has to select the USER FILTERS text in the SETUP list us
215. i Frofilet3 Displays during the measurement performed with the active LOGGER envelope icon There is also possible to present differently the measurement data in 3 PROFILES after pressing the ALT and lt A gt or ALT and v push buttons In this case at the left side of the display three analogue like indicators are shown each one for the selected result from a profile The currently active profile is marked by the cursor and inversely displayed name of the function The filter selected in that profile and the integration type in the case of the linear one or the detector type in the case of exponential are written below the measurement results During the measurements the bottom right clock displays the current time from the range 1 INTEGRATION PERIOD The current result from a selected profile is changed after pressing the lt gt gt or the push buttons The profile the results are coming from is changed after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and or lt SHIFT gt and v The same result can be achieved after pressing the ALT and lt lt gt or ALT and lt gt gt push buttons When the statistics level Lxx is presented the another levels from the set of ten values are available after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt lt gt or lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons The results can be saved using SAVE SAVE NEXT or AUTO SAVE functions after the end of the measurements caused by the selected
216. ignal selection A Notice Only one signal measured in the instrument the RMS detector in the first profile can be used as the triggering signal Additionally the signal from Ext l O can be also used as the trigger source in the SLOPE and SLOPE modes 5 4 1 3 Setting the level of the triggering signal LEVEL The level of the triggering signal LEVEL can be set in 1 dB step or 10 dB steps from 1 mm s to 10 0 km s 60 dB to 140 dB range using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons or lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER HERHSURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE OURCE s ORMSCI SOURCE ORMECI SOURCE SOURCE s ORMSCI LEUEL AiG mise LEVEL LELEL Se Drai LEVEL EB MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the SLOPE mode A Notice The LEVEL value of the triggering signal refers to the instantaneous value of the RMS result from the first profile calculated during the period depending on selected DETECTOR path MENU INPUT PROFILE 1 DETECTOR oa L1 MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE OURCE PHS 15 lt lt gt lt SHIFT gt C GUPCE lt lt gt lt SHIFT gt cnipce LEVEL EVEL LEES LEVEL MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection
217. ii ISO 9001 INSTRUMENTATION FOR SOUND amp VIBRATION I 5 VA MEASUREMENTS AND ANALYSIS SVAN 956 VIBRATION LEVEL METER amp ANALYSER USER S MANUAL DRAFT VERSION SVANTEK Sp Z WARSAW August 2007 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL A Notice This users manual presents the software revision named 6 05 6 05 3 cf the description of the UNIT LABEL position of the DISPLAY list The succeeding software revisions marked with the bigger numbers can slightly change the view of some displays presented in the text of the manual INTRODUCTION 1 1 SVAN 956 as Vibration Meter amp Analyser 1 2 General features of SVAN 956 1 3 Accessories included 1 4 Accessories available 1 5 Software options available 1 6 Current list of SVAN 956 options and accessories MANUAL CONTROL OF THE INSTRUMENT 2 1 Control push buttons on the front panel 2 2 Input and output sockets of the instrument SETTING THE INSTRUMENT 3 1 Basis of the instrument s control 3 2 Powering of the instrument 3 3 Initial setup of the instrument 3 4 Selection of the working mode MODE 3 5 Activation of optional functions 3 6 Memory organisation FUNCTIONS OF THE INSTRUMENT FUNCTION 4 1 Selecting the mode of the instrument MODE 4 2 Measurement functions of the instrument MEASUREMENT FUNCTION 4 3 Instrument s calibration CALIBRATION 4 3 1 Calibration BY SENSITIVITY 4 3 2 The calibration BY MEASUREMENT in the case of vibration
218. ile with the name increased by and SAVE save a setup file with the edited name These functions are available after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons ao Ll SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE SET Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIF Press UP to EDIT Press UP to EDIT SAVE SETUP window in the FILE list The name of the file in which the setup settings are to be saved is displayed above the SAVE or SAVE NEXT text The default name for a setup file is displayed in the case of the first entering to this position after power on The default file name for setup settings is SET The line of the setup file s name edition FILE NAME is opened after pressing the A push button The user can skip the setup file s name edition and start saving file pressing the ENTER push button or return to the FILE list pressing the lt 5 gt one The edition process is presented on the Figure below The displayed inversely character is currently edited The lt lt gt lt gt gt lt lt gt lt gt gt and lt SHIFT gt push buttons are used for editing the name which cannot exceed eight characters SAVE SETUP SAVE SETUP FILE FILE SAUE SAUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Fress ESC to SKIF Fress ESC to SKIF S5H Delete 5H z Inzert S5Hz Delete SH gt Insert Display during the process of setting the
219. in decibels placing in the path LOG instead of LIN 5 19 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL oa RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER 1 LEVEL TRIGGER LEVEL TRIGGER LEVEL TRIGGER LEVEL s ORMSCIY SOURCE s 5012 SOURCE s 15 SOURCE s 15 LEVEL M LEUEL LEUEL a a RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER TRIGGER LEVEL LEWEL LEWEL z LEWEL s ORMSECIS s ORMSCIS ORMSCIS ORMSCIS Al g kmise kj b RECORDER TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection level expressed in linear units 1 dB step up a and 10 dB step up b 5 4 3 4 Setting the speed of the triggering signal changes GRADIENT GRADIENT appears on the display when in the TRIGGER position the GRAD option is selected In the GRADIENT position it is possible to select the GRADIENT value The available values are from 1 dB ms to 100 dB ms The selection is made by pressing lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and ENTER one The RECORDER TRIGGER window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt 5 gt push button a a a RECORDER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER FECORDERE TRIGGER GRAD s GRAD s GRAD ORMSCID 1 ORMSCID 1 RMSCID 116 48 m z 116 4 m z 116 4 m z GRAD GRAD GRAD 1 RMSCID 1 RMSC1 ORMSCID 116 48 m z 116 48 m z 116 48 m z
220. in details in App A The RAM FILE is switched on after placing the special character in the inversely displayed position in the line with the RAM FILE text The activation or deactivation of the RAM FILE is done by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons SAVE OPTIONS SAVE OPTIONS RAM FILE RAM FILE REPLACE i REPLACE AUTO SAVE AUTO SRUE DIRECT SRUE DIRECT SRUE SAVE MAS SPECT SAVE MAS SPECT SAUE SPECT SAUE SPECT SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the RAM FILE After pressing the lt ENTER gt push button the selections made in any position of the sub list in particular also in the RAM FILE are confirmed and the sub list is closed In the case when the AUTO SAVE was active N after pressing the ENTER push button the FILE NAME window is opened for editing the names for the AUTO SAVE files The SAVE OPTION is closed ignoring all settings made in it after pressing the ESC push button The RAM FILE functionality is available only in the LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE mode In the FFT and ENVELOPING modes the line with the RAM FILE text does not appear on the display after entering the SAVE OPTIONS sub list 7 2 2 Replacement of the existing files by the new ones REPLACE 7 7 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The result of the attempt to save the file with the name which already exists in the memory depends on the setting of the REPLACE It is possible to erase the
221. in the FILE list Additionally in some places concerning the file management the info about the name of the current USB disk directory is displayed in the upper line DIRECTORY the name of the current directory These places are as follows DISPLAY LOGGEH VIEW FILE LOAD FILE DELETE RESULT FILES FILE DELETE LOGGER FILES FILE DELETE SETUP FILES FILE CATALOGUE FILE LOAD SETUP The usage of the USB disk modifies also the execution of a few functions namely the DEFRAGMENTATON is not executed e the REAL TIME transmission is stopped e the remote file writing using the 9 function is not available e inthe FILE FREE SPACE window the free space and the total capacity of the USB disk are given e in the file report the name of the current directory of the USB disk is added e the USB disk memory is not divided between the files and the logger so the free space concerns both logger and file memory The USB disk can be disconnected when the measurements are not performed and the results are presented The internal instrument s flash memory is initialised after switching off the USB disk In the USB disk that is divided into partitions its first partition has to serve FAT32 or FAT16 file system Only short name file up to 8 characters similar to DOS system is implemented The existing longer names are shortened A Notice The disconnection of the USB disk during the data transmission can cause the lost of data sa
222. in the predefined format can be obtained by means of the REPORT list In order to open the REPORT list the user has to e press the MENU push button e select from the main list using the A v or lt gt gt push buttons the REPORT text highlight it inversely e press the ENTER push button Display in the main list the REPORT text highlighted displayed inversely In order to obtain the report the user has to connect the instrument to the printer s RS 232 port using the SV 55 RS 232 interface This hardware interface is hidden in the Cannon type 9 pin RS 232 plug in On the other end of the SV 55 interface which itself looks like a cable there is the USB Host plug in This plug in should be placed in the USB Host socket of the instrument It is also possible to connect the instrument to the USB port of a PC using the proper cable Measurement results can be easy downloaded to any PC using USB interface and SvanPC software and printed out on the printer attached to a PC A Notice The converter SV 55 serves as the RS 232 interface The SV 55 connection to the USB Host socket is detected and after successful detection the headphone icon is switched on The transmission using the SV 55 is possible only in the case when the instrument is not connected to a PC with the USB Device port RS232 is the default setting in the USB HOST PORT in the SETUP list Only in this option the USB host cont
223. ing the A v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER The USER FILTERS sub list contains 3 sub lists VIEW EDIT and CLEAR USER FILTERS REAL TIME FILTERS SPECTRUM BASED FILTER USER FILTERS windows SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS selected 9 16 2 1 Looking at the coefficients of the user filters set VIEW The VIEW sub list enables one to look at the coefficients of the USER FILTERS sets saved in the instrument under the names S1 S2 S3 The coefficients can be set by the user in the instrument by means of the EDIT option or sent to it together with the name by means of the interface using 6 function cf App A for the description In order to enter the sub list the user has to select in the SPECTRUM BASED FILTER sub list the VIEW text using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER In the VIEW window one can select one of three mentioned above filters S1 S2 and S3 The selection of the filter in this sub list is performed by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons SPECTRUM BASED E EDIT 9 24 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS window the VIEW text highlighted The sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the USER FILTERS sub list after pressing the lt 5 gt push button ignoring a change made in the position UIEM UIEM VIEW windows the filter selection After pressing the EN
224. ing the A v or lt gt gt push buttons The return to the FILE list is possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button FILE SAUE LOAL DELETE DELETE ALL DEFRAGMENTATION FILE list with the SAVE OPTIONS text highlighted displayed inversely It is possible to write data into the same part of the memory starting all the time with the same address RAM FILE to replace the existing in the memory file by the new with the same name REPLACE to save automatically the results of the measurements AUTO SAVE to save the results of measurements directly DIRECT SAVE to save maxima minima from the spectrum SAVE MAX SPECT SAVE MIN SPECT The position of the sub list is changed after pressing the A v push buttons In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes also the opened sub list 7 2 1 Saving data starting from the same address RAM FILE The measurement data usually are saved in the different files in the flash memory of the instrument There is also possibility to save data in RAM file starting from the same address It means that each time the data are saved the previous file is overwritten This option is useful for the permanent monitoring and remote reading data from the instrument by means of any available interface with the proper period In order to read data saved a RAM file one has to use 44 3 function described
225. instrument the sensitivity and other electronics parameters of vibration transducer This function will 4 6 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL be available soon In order to enter the TEDS window the user has to select the TEDS text in the CALIBRATION list using v push buttons and press the ENTER one oa CALIBRATION BY SENSITIVITY BY MERSUREMEHT CRLIBERTIOM CALIBRATION window TEDS text highlighted TEDS AVAILABLE TEDS window opened NO DATA AVAILABLE message 4 7 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 5 MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS SETTING INPUT The profile parameters can be set in the INPUT list which can be entered after pressing the lt MENU gt push button then selecting by means of the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the INPUT text and finally pressing the ENTER one Main list with the INPUT text selected The INPUT list in the LEVEL METER contains the elements which enable one the independent programming of the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT SETUP the input range MEASUREMENT RANGE parameters of three profiles PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 and PROFILE 3 and the trigger function TRIGGER SETUP In the case of 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE on the display appears SPECTRUM position In the case of FFT analyser on the display appears FFT position and in the case of ENVELOPING the ENVELOPING position After activation with a special code of RPM option in the SETUP list o
226. is impossible and the message is displayed MEASUREMENT PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress The selection of the USER FILTER is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons Ll Ll PRINT U FILTERS PRINT U FILTERS PRIHT U FILTERS PRINT USER FILTERS windows the user filter selection The contents of the selected file is sent out to the attached printer or to a PC after pressing the ENTER push button The following message is displayed on the display during the printing 8 9 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL PRINT U FILTERS Printing Display in the REPORT list the execution of the PRINT USER FILTERS When the message is on the display the data are transferred from the instrument to the attached printer or PC The instrument returns to the REPORT list after transferring all data In the case when the printer or PC is not connected or there is any other reason that it does not receive the data the message about the time limit is displayed The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and lt ALT gt and after pressing a push button it returns to the REPORT list The exemplary USER FILTER coefficients printed in A4 format look as follows C SVANTEK SVAN 956 No 12001 2007 07 20 v6 05 6 05 2 17403427 Vibration meter mode filter
227. k the data storing in the internal instrument s memory is not available any more The user can only copy or move data from the internal memory of the device and store new data in the USB memory stick The scheme of the memory organization of the instrument with the USB memory stick connected is presented below 3 29 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL integration time results RAM load save setup SVAN 956 8 9 ONLY amp time1 srt 23MAR svn car1 svn set svn car2 svn amp time2 wav IV save1 svn amp log4svn I HV WH svn Qsave2svn E save3 svn 200 222 I savexxx svn i setup files main result files time history time domain amp log2 svn EXTERNAL USB FLASH DISK Scheme of the instrument s memory organisation with the USB HOST and memory stick connected A Notice The connection to the USB Host socket the USB disk switches off the instrument s internal flash memory Only copying and moving the files to the USB stick is possible All file functions and remote commands are redirected to the USB disk The internal flash memory is activated after disconnecting the USB disk from the instrument A Notice The disconnection of the USB disk during the data transmission can cause the lost of data saved in the USB disk as well as in the instrument s internal flash memory 3 30 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 4 FUNCTIONS OF THE I
228. lable values of 0 8 Hz centre frequency filter INF 100 0dB 100 0dB 1 00 Hz available values of 1Hz centre frequency filter INF 100 0dB 100 0dB Ke ae fe 9 25 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 20 0kHz available values of 20 kHz centre frequency filter INF 100 0dB 100 0dB The selection of the position in the set is performed by means of the A v push buttons The value is introduced by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the USER FILTERS sub list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all settings made in the sub list or ESC push button ignoring all settings made in the sub list Coca ccm gt S1 filter windows the coefficient selection 9 16 2 3 Clearing the coefficients of the user filters CLEAR The CLEAR position enables the user to clear the values of the user coefficients of octave or third octave filters It is possible to clear all sets of coefficients ALL to clear the first set S1 to clear the second set S2 to clear the third one S3 or any other transmitted to the instrument from a PC by means of the interface a SPECTRUM BASED VIEW EDIT SPECTRUM BASED FILTER window the CLEAR position selected In order to enter the sub list the user has to select in the SPECTRUM BASED FILTER sub list the CLEAR text using the lt A gt v lt lt
229. lays with the selected logger s file the change of the cursor position The scrolling of the display to the right left is made when the cursor is at the left right end of the graphical presentation space and the lt lt gt lt gt gt push button is still pressed and in the file there are still the results Display with the selected logger file the scrolling to the left The position of the horizontal axis in relation to the vertical one can be changed after pressing the A v push buttons together with the lt SHIFT gt one 6 16 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Displays with the selected logger s file the change of the axis relation The results from logger s file coming from different profiles are changed after pressing the A or Ww push buttons after each pressing the result from the next profile is displayed B c EET j o H eua H H 13 15 6 33 000s 16 33 aes Displays with the selected logger s file the change of the profile The results from logger s file coming from the same profile are displayed after each pressing of the ALT and lt lt gt or ALT and lt gt gt push buttons lt ALT gt lt gt gt Displays with the selected logger s file the change of the result from a profile 6 4 Setting the parameters of the display SCREEN SETUP The SCREEN SETUP window enables the user to set the proper contrast of the display and switch on the backlight s aut
230. le 5 3 4 MAX result selection for saving in a logger s file LOGGER MAX In order to save the MAX result cf the definition in App the user has to activate this line by means of the lt A gt v push buttons and place a special character in the brackets using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button any changes made the window are confirmed and it is closed The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made in the window is made after pressing the lt 5 gt push button oa oa PROFILE i gt PROFILE i gt PROFILECZ PROFILECZ 5 10 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL PROFILE 3 PROFILE 3 PROFILE x windows the MAX result to be not saved or saved in logger s file 5 3 5 result selection for saving in a logger s file LOGGER In order to save the P P result cf the definition in App D the user has to activate this line by means of the A v push buttons and place a special character in the brackets using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons After pressing the ENTER push button any changes made in the window are confirmed and it is closed The return to the INPUT list ignoring any changes made in the window is made after pressing the lt 5 gt push button LR FILECc1 PROFILE ___PROFILE 3 gt 1 __ FILTER HPI FILTER HPI ETECTOR 1 DETECTOR 1 05 LO GBER
231. line respectively The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The first file is available after pressing the with lt SHIFT gt push button or v with lt SHIFT gt and the last one is displayed after pressing the lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or lt A gt with lt SHIFT gt LOG FILE amp LOG DATE 19 MAR 2887 TIME 16 28 28 Selection of the RESULT FILES to be deleted The selected file is deleted after pressing the ENTER push button The message is displayed after the successful end of the operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the DELETE sub list ILE 19 LEUEL METER L aL 5176 MARES 19HBRR amp 4 E EVEL METER IOTER 1 gt lt ENTER gt gt gt lt ANY PUSH BUTTON gt gt 19 MAR 2807 PRESS ANY KEY 18 48 28 DELETE FILE S175 RESULT FILES u __ FILE 19MAR6S LOGGER FILES gt lt ENTER gt gt SETUP FILES 1 E 19 MAR 2887 18 58 ZB Execution of the RESULT FILES deletion After the execution of the result files removing from the memory usually the FREE SPACE memory path MENU FILE FREE SPACE rests the same as before the deletion but TOTAL AVAILABLE memory is increased
232. lt SHIFT gt and the last is displayed after pressing the lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or lt A gt with lt SHIFT gt FILE HO E HAME IL LEUEL METER Log DATE 19 MAR 2887 TIME 16 16 88 Exemplary contents of the LOAD window 7 13 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL A Notice Many result files can be associated with one logger file i e during the execution of the AUTO SAVE function LFS FILE HD 637175 ETE BPE TIE 5 1 FILE SPECT26 IUIBE 1 UIBF 1 IUIBR 1 WIBR 1 L0G2 LOG FILE amp 052 LOG FILE amp 052 COG FILE 0652 DATE 21 MAR 2887 DATE 21 MAR 2887 DATE 21 MAR 2887 DATE 21 MAR 2887 TIME 13 83 48 TIME 13 83 52 TIME 13 84 82 TIME 13 85 38 Exemplary result files associated with the same logger file amp LOG2 The name of the file is accepted and the file is loaded after pressing the ENTER push button The message with the name of the selected file is displayed during the execution of the loading operation 1 1 9 Loading Display during the execution of the loading function The next message is displayed after successful end of loading operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt or ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list L FILE SAVE Loaded Loaded Loade
233. lts from the first profile PEAK 1 or RMS 1 can be used for the purpose described above In order to select the function of the digital output the user has to use the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons in the active line with the SOURCE text The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes made there or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring all changes I O SETUP DIGITAL OUT FUNCTION ALARM PULSE ACTIVE LEVEL 100 OURCE FAISE ALARM LEVEL 166 06 f ALARM LEVEL EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the SOURCE selection 9 3 6 Alarm level selection on the digital output of I O ALARM LEVEL In the ALARM LEVEL it is possible to set the level of the result to be monitored during the measurements If the result is greater than the one set in this line the instrument will generate the alarm signal in the selected logic The available levels are within the range 30 0 dB 140 dB 9 7 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The ALARM LEVEL current value decreasing increasing by 0 1 dB is possible by means of the lt gt gt push buttons The step can be decreased increased up to 1 dB after pressing simultaneously the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons with the lt SHIFT gt one The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes made in the window or lt ESC gt p
234. made in the window or lt ESC gt push buttons ignoring all changes made there R5232 R5232 R5232 BAUD RATE 115288 RATE 115288 BAUD RATE TIME OUT TIME OUT OUT RS232 window the setting of the TIME OUT with 1 second step BAUD RATE TIME OUT BAUD RATE BAUD FATE 115200 TIME DUT TIME OUT RS232 window the setting of the TIME OUT with 10 seconds step 9 11 Programming the instrument s internal Real Time Clock RTC The RTC enables one to programme the internal Real Time Clock This clock is displayed in the different places depending on the selected presentation mode In order to enter the position the user has to select the RTC text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER REFERENCE LEWELS REMOTE RMS INTEGRATION RPM MEASUREMENT 5252 SETUP list the text highlighted displayed inversely 9 13 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The selection of the setting parameter hour minute second day month and year is performed using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and the change of its value using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt L RTC RTC RTC RTC WE 16 46 11 HI 12 11 16 8 11 16 24 69 OCT 2086 69 OCT
235. measurement 7 28 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL CATALOGUE HO FILES CATALOGUE window when the memory is empty In the case when the result and setup files memory in the instrument is not empty some files are stored another window is displayed in which the same data about the existing in the instrument files as in the FILE LOAD window are presented The current number of the file and the total number of the saved result and setup files is displayed in the first line of the window The name of the file is displayed in the second line its current number is presented in the first line The name of the file suggests the operation the file was created in The names in which the first character is are coming from the AUTO SAVE function The file with the default name Timer is coming from the AUTO SAVE function executed in the TIMER operation The other names suggest the SAVE SAVE NEXT function The type of the current file LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT or ENVELOPING and the mode VIBRATION is given in the third line If during the measurements which results are saved in the file the logger file was also created its name is displayed in the fourth line A Notice The logger file can be deleted from the instrument s memory in the FILE DELETE LOGGER FILES window and this deleting operation does not modify the contents of the fourth line of the CATALOGUE window The date and time of the SAVE operation are dis
236. memory stick Saving files In the case of the SVAN 956 instrument there are files containing data e from Vibration LEVEL METER e from 1 1 OCTAVE analysis e from 1 3 OCTAVE mode e from FFT analysis from ENVELOPING mode e stored in the instrument s logger accessible in the DISPLAY LOGGER VIEW window A Notice The logger files are created automatically the usage of the SAVE is not required Each file consists of some elements which are the same for all kind of files e file header e the unit and software specification e the user s text stored together with the measurement data e the parameters and global settings e the special settings for profiles e the marker of the end of the file The other elements of the file structure depend on the type of the file VLM 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT ENVELOPING logger These elements are as follows e main results e the results coming from 1 1 OCTAVE analysis e the results coming from 1 3 OCTAVE analysis e the header of the FFT analysis performed in the selected band e the FFT analysis results e the results coming from ENVELOPING mode e the header of the file from the logger e the data stored during the measurements in the logger s file 7 1 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL A Notice The detailed description of all types of file structures is given in the Appendix B Storing the vibration measurement results as files in the instrumen
237. ments METRIC e g m s m s m position available values NON METRIC e g g ips mil position available values WARNINGS RESULTS NOT SAVE it enables the user to switch on or off the warning that the results of the measurement were not saved in the memory available values N or 1 USB DISK FREE SP it enables to generate a warning after checking free space on the USB disk MIN FREE SPACE specifies the limit of available memory for warning if the available memory is not greater than that limit the warning will be displayed available values 1 MB 1024 MB SVAN 956 USER MANUAL oo ma MENU LANGUAGE FUNCTIOH DEUTSCH DISPLAY ESPRHR L FILE Sere current ITALIANO REPORT REFERENCE LEVELS FLEMISH REMOTE COMMUNICATION FRAN AIS ma LANGUAGE FLEMISH FRAH AIS MAGYAR POLSKI PYCCKHA 79 CURRENT REFERENCE LEUELS REMOTE COMMUNICATIONY 1 0 SETUP UT LEUELS REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS mo 1 0 SETUP DIGITAL OUT FUNCTIOH TRIG PULSE POLARISATION Ma REFERI L REMOTE COMMUNICATIO mo CURRENT L 1 1 5 mA a REFERENCE LEVELS 3 19 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 3 20 REMOTE LANGUAGE CLEAR SETUP EXTERNAL 1 0 SETUP IEE CURRENT REMOTE PACKET PRCKET ERE X RMS INTEGRATION BERNAL Ivo setup CURRENT JL THERE REFERENCE LEVELS 1 EXPONENTIAL REMO RMS INTEGR
238. meters in logger setting LOGGER TRIGGER The LOGGER TRIGGER parameters influence the way the measurement results are saved in the logger It is a contexts sub list in which the triggering in logger can be switched off or on TRIGGER in the case when on LEVEL the source of the triggering signal is determined SOURCE its level can be selected LEVEL the number of the results saved in the logger before the fulfilment of the triggering condition PRE and the number of the results saved in the logger after the fulfilment of the triggering condition POST If the triggering signal is greater than the selected in the LEVEL the logger contains e the measurement results registered directly before the fulfilment of the triggering condition time of the registration can be calculated by multiplying the value set in the PRE by the time period taken from the LOGGER STEP path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LOGGER STEP e all measurement results up to the moment the triggering signal falls down the LEVEL e the results registered directly after the fulfilment of the triggering condition time of the registration can be calculated by multiplying the value set in the POST by the time period taken from the LOGGER STEP path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LOGGER STEP In order to change the displayed inversely parameter the user has to press the A v push buttons The confirmation of any change made in the window requires pressing
239. n The cursor is moved with lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The current character is changed with lt SHIFT gt lt A gt SHIFT2 v push buttons The combination lt SHIFT gt lt lt gt deletes the character currently pointed by the cursor combination lt SHIFT gt lt gt gt inserts a new character in the position of the cursor No results text will be displayed if the instrument did not perform any measurement in prior to choosing the SAVE option gt SAVE OPTIONS sub list RAM FILE only in LEVEL METER mode gives the user a possibility to save data in RAM file Each time the data are saved the previous file is overwritten available values N or REPLACE it enables the user to replace the existing files in the instruments memory by the files having the same name available values N or SAVE STATISTICS it enables the user to save or not the calculated statistics along with the measurement results available values N or AUTO SAVE it enables the user to save the measurement results in the instrument s memory automatically without entering SAVE or SAVE NEXT position in order to perform this operation the INT PERIOD should be set to at least 10 S available values N or DIRECT SAVE this option enables saving the results with the automatically incremented name after pressing the ENTER and lt ALT gt push buttons together SAVE MAX it enables the user
240. n 3 PROFILES can be switched on or off placing or replacing the special character in the displayed inversely line with the 3 PROFILES text by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the ENTER push button This confirmation closes also the DISPLAY MODES sub list The sub list can be also closed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the settings made there are ignored oa oa DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY MODES SPECTRUM SPECTRUM s E 3 PROFILES 3 PROFILES L GGER sp L GGER sp FILE IMFO L FILE IMFO iC Setting on and off the accessibility of three profiles presentation mode The exemplary measurement results presented in the 3 PROFILES mode when the results from three profiles are on the display are given below In the case of the 3 PROFILES in three consecutive lines the following data are seen the name of the function the result together with the units and the profil number P 1 P 2 P 3 The current real time the profile from which the result is displayed inversely and the name of the file in which the results are saved are displayed at the bottom At the right bottom there is another clock which displays real time in the case when the measurements are performed and the current second of the measurement in the opposite case n CREM 298 647 HTUU 138 mrs Frofilecli 17 so File 13APRe 01 Measurement results 3
241. n eren nennen 7 32 Displays in the FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt push buttons 7 32 Displays in the FILE NAME edition after pressing the lt 5 gt and lt lt gt push buttons 7 32 Displays during the attempt of overwriting the existing file changing the name and saving data 7 33 Displays in the simplified edition of the setup file name and saving operation 7 33 Displays in the simplified edition of the file name saving and the saturation of that operation 7 33 Displays after the attempt to perform unavailable saving operation the return to the SAVE SETUP 7 34 View of all displays during and after the execution of the SAVE 7 34 Displays after the attempt to overwrite a file if the REPLACE is active 7 34 FILE list with the LOAD SETUP text highlighted displayed e 7 35 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 35 Display during the execution of the LOAD SETUP eee nenne nennen 7 35 Exemplary contents of the LOAD SETUP window sees ener nenne nene trennen 7 35 Displays after t
242. n the display appears additionally RPM position OFILE 3 a TRIGGER SETUP L 22s SINE P TE 22 ee IHPUT MEASUREMENT RANGE MEASUREMENT RANGE MEASUREMENT RANGE MEASUREMENT SETUP PROFILE 1 PROFILE 1 PROFILE 1 MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFILE 2 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 1 PROFILE 3 PROFILE 3 PROFILE 3 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 b TRIGGER SETUP TRIGGER SETUP 214 TRIGGER SETUP zle INPUT list in the LEVEL METER a in 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE analyser b in FFT analyser c in ENVELOPING d and after activation of RPM option e A Notice Any parameter in the INPUT list can be changed only when the instrument does not execute a measurement The possibility of a change is signalled by displaying inversely a parameter s field Moreover normally displayed field means that the parameter cannot be changed The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is performing the measurements ow MEASUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP FE FILECZ MEASURE TRIGGER START DELAY STAR 1s T DELAY 1s FILTER HPS IMTEGE PERIOD ifs IMTEGE PERIOD ifs DET Euis OFF EF CYCLE Inf CYCLE Inf LOGGER on LOGGER LOGGER STEP is LOGGER 10814 Displays with not active sub lists of INPUT list during measurement 5 1 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL A Notice The parameters can be presented in LOGARITHMIC decibels or LINEAR m s units It depends on the DISPLAY SCA
243. n the line with the option s name the user has to press the lt gt push button FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION CRLIBFRTION HODE ACCELERATION 1 ACCELERATION 1 VOLTAGE WOLTAGE b c Displays with the FUNCTION list opened MODE selected a and MODE sub list opened with ACCELERATION b and VOLTAGE c mode selected 3 5 Activation of optional functions The 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT ENVELOPING and time history data LOGGER time domain signal recording human vibration filters RPM SIGNAL GENERATOR are the optional functions broadening the applications of the instrument Some of the additional functions are specified in the MEASUR FUNCTION path MENU FUNCTION others in the other lists FUNCTION _ FUNCTION MODE LEVEL METER MEASUREMENT FUNCT LOW 11 1 OCTAVE CALIBRAT ICH 11 53 OCTAVE 1 FFT 1 EHUELDPIHG oa oa oa MEASUR FUNCTION MEASUR FUNCTION MEASUR FUNCTION 1 LEUEL METER LEWEL METER LEWEL METER LEWEL METER 121 1271 OCTAVE 1 1 OCTAVE 1 1 OCTAVE 1 1 3 OCTAVE 14 1 3 OCTAVE 175 OCTAVE 1 ENWELOPING EMVELOPING L L L Displays with the FUNCTION list opened MEASUREMENT FUNCTION selected a and MEASUR FUNCTION sub list opened with all available options b d e f A function is selected by placing the special character in the line with the function s name
244. nd depends on the moment and the way the measurements were stopped oa a FILE INFO FILE INFO 1 I LOMARBS Boris 15 08 ELAPSED TIME amp 88 88 81 ELRPSED 81 Exemplary contents of FILE INFO window 6 2 Setting the parameters of the graphical modes DISPLAY SETUP The DISPLAY SETUP sub list enables the user to change several parameters of the graphical results presentations Using the DISPLAY SCALE sub list for example one can select the scale in the available modes of graphical presentation of the measurement results time history in the LOGGER and spectra in the SPECTRUM Using the TOTAL VALUES sub list it is possible to select the weighting filters used in the calculation of the Total values This sub list appears on the display only in the case of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analyser Using the SPECTRUM TYPE sub list which appears on the display only in VM it is possible to select the spectrum type which has to be presented during the vibration measurements In order to enter the DISPLAY SETUP list one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed DISPLAY SETUP text of the DISPLAY list The DISPLAY SETUP sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY after pressing the lt ESC gt push button which ignores any changes in the positions of the sub list or the ENTER push button which confirms the changes 6 7 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL DISPLAY Daria
245. ng in the instrument logger files as in the DISPLAY LOGGER VIEW window are displayed after successful opening the FILE DELETE LOGGER FILES one pressing the ENTER push button In the first line the available still loggers memory is displayed followed by The selected number of the logger s file and the number of all saved files FILE NO e The name of the logger s file LOG FILE e The size of the logger file which name is displayed in the previous line LOG SIZE e The results saved if any are present in the logger from the first profile P 1 e The results saved if any are present in the logger from the second profile P 2 e The results saved if any are present in the logger from the third profile P 3 The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The first file is available after pressing the with lt SHIFT gt push button or v with lt SHIFT gt and the last one is displayed after pressing the lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or lt A gt with lt SHIFT gt PCDIPERK MAX MIN RMS PcsoaMax MIN PiS PEAK RMS Selection of the LOGGER FILES to be deleted The selected file is deleted after pressing the lt ENTER gt push button The message is displayed after the successful end of the operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the
246. ng of the measurement results PRINT RESULTS 8 4 8 3 Printing of the measurement results from the selected file PRINT FILE 8 6 8 4 Printing of the logger results PRINT LOGGER 8 8 8 5 Printing of the coefficients of the user filters PRINT USER FILTERS 8 9 8 6 Printing of the file s catalogue PRINT CATALOGUE 8 11 8 7 Selection of the printing options OPTIONS 8 13 8 7 1 Selection of the format of the print out FORMAT 8 13 8 7 2 Controlling the paper ejection after print out EJECT P 8 13 SETUP MENU SETUP 9 1 9 1 Setting the language of the user interface LANGUAGE 9 2 9 2 Return to the factory settings CLEAR SETUP 9 4 9 3 Setting parameters of the Ext I O port EXTERNAL I O SETUP 9 5 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 9 3 1 Mode selection of the Ext I O port MODE 9 3 2 Digital output function selection of the socket FUNCTION 9 3 3 Polarisation selection of the digital output signal POLARISATION 9 3 4 Active level selection of the digital output signal ACTIVE LEVEL 9 3 5 Source signal selection for the alarm pulse generation SOURCE 9 3 6 Alarm level selection on the digital output of I O ALARM LEVEL 9 4 Activation of human vibration filters HUMAN VIB FILT 9 5 Selection of the current IEPE supply IEPE CURRENT 9 6 Reference signal in vibration measurements REFERENCE LEVELS 9 6 1 Setting the reference level of the acceleration signal ACC 9 6 2 Setting the reference level of the velocity signal VEL 9 6 3 Setting the r
247. nged using the A or v push button this functionality is not available in the SAVE SAVE NEXT function The subsequent digits underline big letters and space appear on the display in the inversely displayed position after each pressing of the mentioned above push buttons The edition is finished after pressing the ENTER push button The edited name is compared with the file names existing in the catalogue In the case when the file with the same name already exists the special message is displayed and after pressing any character except the SHIFT or ALT one the instrument returns once more to the FILE NAME window ao FILE NAME FILE NAME GRESH INCORRECT FILE NAME SH Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY Delete SH Insert Displays after the incorrect file name edition When the AUTO SAVE option is active V after starting the measurements by pressing the lt START STOP gt push button the results are saved in the file with the selected name Depending on 7 9 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL the instrument s mode and selected options the sequence of the displays available after each pressing of the A or v could be as presented below 1 45 Soe mm s 531 222 eis mms 5i3nmmn z Protileci x Pronn STIY File RESii4 INFO RMS 1 8s FILE MAME mRES114 IZE 3886 17647 158 mmis 24 ELAPSED TIME G 00 17 1
248. nly one measured result can be used as a source of the triggering signal in the LEVEL METER mode namely the output signal from the RMS detector coming from the first profile which is denoted here as RMS 1 This position does not become active it is not displayed inversely and the text stated here remains unchanged in the case of LEVEL LEVEL or GRAD triggering mode After pressing there the v push button the SOURCE line is skipped oa MEASURE TRIGGER HEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER ENNINZNE TRIGGER LEVEL OUR ORMSCID SOURCE ORMSCID 118 8 m z WEL oa MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER LEWEL GRAD GRAD RMSE 1 RHSCIO 1 116 6 mis EER 116 0 mis WEL GRADIENT 18dBE mz GRADIENT 1996 MEASURE TRIGGER windows with not active SOURCE signal line 5 13 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL In the case of SLOPE and SLOPE as a source of the triggering signal can be used the signal connected to the external input output socked named The selection of the source of the triggering signal is performed using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons a MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE TRIGGER SLOPE SOURCE EDEN SOURCE EST IA SOURCE SOURCE H EST IA LEUEL 1108 8 mis LEUEL 116 8 mis MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the SOURCE s
249. ode 2 Attach the vibration calibrator to the instrument s accelerometer 3 Switch on the calibrator and wait approximately 30 seconds before starting the calibration measurement 4 Start the calibration measurement by pressing the lt START STOP gt push button The measurement starts after 5 seconds delay The measurement time is also predefined to 5 seconds During the calibration period the lt ESC gt and lt PAUSE gt push buttons do not operate but it is 4 4 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL possible to stop the measurement using the START STOP push button Waiting for the calibration measurement to begin a DELAY is counted down ao a Low BY MEASUREMENT BY MEASUREMENT CAL LEWEL CAL LEWEL 146 6 mis DELAY 5 DELAY 5 Displays while the instrument is waiting for the calibration measurement to commence At the end of the measurement the result is displayed on the display in the bottom line Ll ow ow BY MEASUREMENT BY MEASUREMENT BY MEASUREMENT CAL LEVEL CAL LEVEL CAL LEVEL 140 CAL MEASURE RMS Displays during the calibration measurements ao BY MEASUREMENT BY HERSUREHEHT CAL LEUEL CAL LEUEL 14 6 mis Displays after the calibration measurements The calibration procedure should be repeated a few times to ensure the integrity of the calibration The obtained results should be almost identical with
250. of four positions BY SENSITIVITY BY MEASUREMENT which are used to perform the calibration LAST CALIBRATION which contains the list of the performed in the past the calibration measurements and the obtained results and TEDS which is used for automatical reading of vibration transducer parameters HEHU FUNCTION UMCT ION MODE MEASUREMENT FUNCT IOM CALIBRAT LOH THPUT DISPLAY REPORT SETUP a b Displays with the main list the FUNCTION text selected a the FUNCTION list opened the CALIBRATION text selected b 4 2 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL A Note The calibration level and the calibration result is expressed in different units depending on the settings of the instrument The metric or non metric vibration units are set in the VIBRATION UNITS path MENU SETUP VIBRATION UNITS Additionally the linear or logarithmic units are set in the DISPLAY SCALE path MENU DISPLAY DISPLAY SETUP DISPLAY SCALE 4 3 1 Calibration BY SENSITIVITY The calibration by the accelerometer s sensitivity introduction can be conducted in the following 1 Select this type of the calibration highlight the BY SENSITIVITY text from the CALIBRATION sub list and press the ENTER push button CALIBRATION BY SENSITIVITY BY SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY MEA 18 BY SUREM LAST CALIBRATION TEDS Displays with the selected calibration mode and after entering this mode A Notice It is no
251. old file and to save the new one with the same name if the position is active 1 The activation or deactivation of the REPLACE is done by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons SAVE OPTIONS SAVE OPTIONS SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the REPLACE The message is displayed that such operation is not available in the case when this position is not active cf the description of the SAVE In the other case the existing file is overwritten 12380CT9 12380CT9 used Saved PRESS ANY KEY PRESS ANY KEY Displays during the file saving when the REPLACE is switched off and on After pressing the ENTER push button the selections made any position of the sub list in particular also in the REPLACE are confirmed and the sub list is closed In the case when the AUTO SAVE was active after pressing the ENTER push button the FILE NAME window is opened for editing the names for the AUTO SAVE files The SAVE OPTION sub list is closed ignoring all settings made in it after pressing the lt ESC gt push button 7 2 3 Controlling the measurement results savings AUTO SAVE Using the AUTO SAVE one can set the self saving of the measurement results V or to switch off this possibility The activation or deactivation of the AUTO SAVE is done by pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons This position was also established in orde
252. omatic switch off after a certain period 30 seconds In order to enter the window one has to press the lt ENTER gt push button on the inversely displayed SCREEN SETUP text of the DISPLAY list The SCREEN SETUP window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY list after pressing the lt ESC gt or the ENTER push button a DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES UNIT LABEL DISPLAY list the SCREEN SETUP text highlighted 6 4 11 Setting the contrast of the display CONTRAST The CONTRAST enables the user to set the proper contrast of the display by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The position is opened after pressing the ENTER push button on the highlighted displayed inversely CONTRAST text The user can select 21 different values of this parameter A Notice The new value of the contrast is confirmed after each pressing of the lt lt gt or lt gt gt push buttons new value is selected without any confirmation from the lt gt push button SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The window is closed and the instrument returns to the DISPLAY list after pressing the lt ESC gt or lt gt push button oa L1 SCREEN SETUP SCREEN SETUP SCREEN SETUP SCREEN SETUP CONTRAST CONTRAST CONTRAST CONTRAST BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT 21 EACKLIGHT TIMEOUT C47 BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT 21 BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT 4 SCREEN SETUP windows the ch
253. on from the FILE list The logger files are created automatically the usage of the SAVE is not required The scheme of the instrument s memory organisation without the USB HOST controller is presented below 3 28 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL MEMORY ORGANIZATION OF THE SVAN 95x instrument series without USB HOST integration time results gt lt avaliable only for particular models L like SVAN 959 etc only with external 5 USB flash memory oc s gt 23MAR svn lt s lt 5 amp log2 svn BE car2 svn 4 amp log3 svn ei Lg HV HA svn save1 svn amp log4 svn 1 lt HV WH svn 2 4 Z gt ox 4 sns 24 a savexxx svn J amp logxxx svn z setup files main result files time history files Scheme of the instrument s memory organisation without the USB CHOST A Notice The instrument s logger memory is independent from the results and setup memory The capacity of the available memory is equal to 32 MB and is divided between logger 15 859 224 bytes and results and setup settings 16 252 428 bytes A Notice The logger files are created automatically the usage of the SAVE is not required When the user connects to the instrument the USB memory stic
254. op the measurements the user has to press it simultaneously with the lt SHIFT gt one A Notice The change of the START STOP push button mode is performed in the SHIFT MODE window of the SETUP list see description of the SETUP list ENTER This push button enables one to enter the selected operation mode or to confirm the control options Some additional functions of this push button will be described in the following chapters of this manual MENU This push button pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one enables the user to enter the main list containing six sub lists FUNCTION INPUT DISPLAY FILE REPORT and SETUP Each of the mentioned above sub lists consists of the sub lists elements and data windows These main sub lists 2 2 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL will be described in details in the following chapters of the manual Double pressed MENU push button enters the list containing eight last opened sub lists It often speeds up the control of the instrument as the user has the faster access to the frequently used sub lists lt SAVE gt This push button pressed together with the lt ALT gt one enables the user to save measurement results as a file in the internal instrument s memory or on the USB memory stick There are two available functions SAVE NEXT save file with the name increased by one e g 02JANO 02JAN1 O2JAN3 SAVE save a file with the edited name lt ESC
255. or DETECTOR 1 0s the results of the measurements are not stored in the logger s file LOGGER PEAK LOGGER LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS PROFILE 2 HP3 weighting filter FILTER HP3 1 0s type of the RMS detector DETECTOR 1 0s the results of the measurements are not stored in the logger s file LOGGER PEAK LOGGER LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS PROFILE 3 HP10 weighting filter FILTER HP10 1 0s type of the RMS detector DETECTOR 1 05 the results of the measurements are not stored in the logger s file LOGGER PEAK LOGGER LOGGER MAX LOGGER RMS The user can change all mentioned above settings using PROFILE x sub list of the INPUT list The instrument remembers all changes The return to the default settings set up by the producer is possible after the execution of the CLEAR SETUP position available in the SETUP list The instrument can be used not only as the vibration level meter VLM but also as 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE analyser FFT analyser and perform ENVELOPING function In order to distinguish the LEVEL METER function from the others which are available in 3 PROFILES display mode two continuous horizontal lines are used to separate the measurement results from different profiles In other modes than VLM the mentioned above lines are dotted w rm RMS 83 2mms Waid 24g rms n CHEN 20 2 i9 1nmsz RMS 74 1nmmz P RHS 17
256. ormat 4 8 10 Example of the printed coefficients of the user filter S2 format 5 8 11 REPORT windows with the PRINT CATALOGUE selected sees 8 11 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 8 11 Display in the REPORT list the execution of the PRINT CATALOGUE 8 11 Displays with the confirmation request of the paper 8 12 Example of the printed catalogue format A4 sssssssssssssesseeseeeeee nennen enne nenne nene tren trennen nennen 8 12 Example of the printed catalogue format 5 8 12 Display during the catalogue printing when there is no data transfer 8 13 REPORT windows with the OPTION selected nsn eene ennt nenne tren trennen 8 13 OPTIONS windows the selection of the 9 8 13 OPTIONS windows the selection of the paper 8 14 Displays with the request for the confirmation of the paper ejection 8 14 Display after a printing when there is not possible to eject a paper 8 14 Display in the main list the SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely eene 9 1 SEEDIUPst2 e EH REIR e eerie n b
257. pears only in case when external USB memory stick is connected to the instrument it informs the user about connected memory stick the free space on USB memory stick number of directory the number of files enables also to edit the name of the directory this position appears only in when the external USB memory stick is connected to the instrument it enables to copy files from the internal memory of the instrument to the connected USB memory stick this position appears only in case when USB memory stick is connected to the instrument it enables the user to move files from the internal memory of the instrument to the connected USB memory stick Pressing the lt SHIFT gt and lt A gt or lt SHIFT gt and results in a movement to the first position of the opened list and pressing the lt SHIFT gt and v or lt SHIFT gt and lt gt gt results in a movement to the last position of the opened list 7 2 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL SAVE SETUP DELETE ALL CEFRAGMENTAT ION FILE list of the instrument In each available position any change is performed by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed After this confirmation the opened window or list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the opened window or list the user has to press the lt 5 gt push button 7 1 Saving files in the instrument s memory SAVE and SAVE NEX
258. per in the printer has to be SVAN 956 USER MANUAL ejected to the new page The change of the available answers is possible after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the REPORT list is performed after pressing the ENTER push button with the possible ejection of the paper to the new page PRIHTIHG um m mum Em PRINTING Displays with the confirmation request of the paper ejection The exemplary printed catalogue is presented below C SVANTEK SVAN 956 No 12001 2007 08 18 v6 06 6 CATALOGUE CONTENTS umber of files 15 Name Mf Length Date Time ame Mf Length RES1 lt Vo gt 426 07 08 17 17 59 RES2 lt Vo gt 426 RES3 lt Vo gt 426 07 08 17 17 59 RES4 lt Vo gt 426 CRESS lt Vo gt 426 07 08 17 17 59 RES6 lt Vo gt 426 RES7 lt Vo gt 426 07 08 17 18 00 RES8 lt Vo gt 426 QRES9 Vo 426 07 08 17 18 00 RES10 lt Vo gt 426 511 Vo 426 07 08 17 18 00 512 V1 380 RES13 V1 380 07 08 17 18 01 RES14 V1 380 SETO RE 2280 07 08 17 18 05 06 3 Date 07 08 17 07 08 17 07 08 17 07 08 17 07 08 17 07 08 17 07 08 17 16 38 08 Time 59 59 59 00 00 01 OO Example of the printed catalogue format 4 The same catalogue printed in A5 format looks as follows 8 12 C SVANTEK SVAN 956 No 12001 2007 08 18 v6
259. play after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If the measurements are not performed the instrument requests the confirmation of the operation after entering this window after pressing the ENTER push button After next pressing the lt ENTER gt push button when the NO option is selected the window is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list The selection of the NO or YES option is possible using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the FILE list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button a a DELETE ALL DELETE ALL Displays with the confirmation window during the execution of the DELETE ALL operation All files from the selected type are deleted after the ENTER push button pressing when the YES option is selected The message is displayed after the successful execution of all stages of the operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list Defragmentation Clearing I 0 EM Please wait Please wait Deleted 0 PRESS ANY KEY Execution of the DELETE ALL operation in the case of SETUP FILES selection A Notice The execution of the DELETE ALL function described above takes place in the case when only one type of the files is selected in the DELETE ALL
260. play in the main list the DISPLAY text highlighted displayed inversely The DISPLAY list is used for setting the various parameters which are mainly dedicated for the control of the display The following items are present on this list DISPLAY MODES enables one to select the mode of the measurement results presentation DISPLAY SETUP enables one to change the scale in the graphical modes of result s presentation and the parameters of the logger s result presentation LOGGER VIEW enables one to select and present the results stored in the logger s files SCREEN SETUP enables one to set the contrast and the switch on off the backlight timeout of the instrument s display BATTERY it informs the user about the source of powering of the instrument and current power supply voltage UNIT LABEL informs the user about the serial number of the instrument the version of the internal software and the standards to which conform the measurement results In each available position any change is performed by means of the A v and lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed After this confirmation the opened window or list is closed In order to ignore any changes made in the opened window or list the user has to press the lt 5 gt push button DISPLAY DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY SETUP LOGGER MIEM SCREEH SETUP BATTERY UNIT LABEL Display with the DISPLAY list
261. played in the fifth and sixth line respectively The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The first file is available after pressing the lt lt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or v with lt SHIFT gt and the last one is displayed after pressing the lt gt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or A with lt SHIFT gt The setup file is indicated by the SETUP text displayed in the third line instead of the LEVEL METER DOSE METER text CATALOGUE CATALOGUE CATALOGUE CATALOGUE FILE WANE SPECTIG 1 1 OCTAVE SOUND E 19 MAR 2887 E E 19 2887 E h ME 16 20 26 TIME 18 48 28 18 55 5 Contents of the CATALOGUE window A Notice Many result files can be associated with one logger file i e during the execution of the AUTO SAVE function 7 29 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL oa CATALOGUE CATALOGUE CATALOGU CATALOGUE 527183 DATE 21 MAR 2007 DATE 21 MAR 2007 TIME 13 03 48 TIME 13 03 52 Exemplary result files associated with the same logger file amp LOG2 in the CATALOGUE window 7 8 Checking the free space in the memory FREE SPACE The FREE SPACE is used to read out the free space in the FLASH DISC memory of the instrument In order to enter the window the user has to select the FREE SPACE text in the FILE list using the A v or lt gt gt push buttons and press th
262. plete information about measured signal in non volatile 32 MB internal memory or external USB Memory Stick and can be easy downloaded to any PC using the USB interface and SvanPC software All required weighting filters e g Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh for Human Vibration measurement Wg Wb or VelMF for machine diagnostic measurements including the latest ISO 2631 1 amp 2 and ISO 10816 standards are available with this instrument The RMQ detector enables direct measurement of the Vibration Dose Value VDV Using computational power of its digital signal processor the SVAN 956 instrument can simultaneously additionally perform real time FFT analysis 1 1 OCTAVE analysis or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis and sophisticated enveloping analysis The SVAN 956 offers also RPM measurement with Monarch laser tachometer parallel to the vibration measurement The time domain signal recording on the external USB memory stick is also available as an option The instrument can be controlled and the measuerement results can be also downloaded to any PC using the RS232 or IrDA interfaces The instrument is powered from four AA standard or rechargeable batteries i e NiMH separate charger is required The powering of the instrument from the External DC power source or the USB interface is also provided Robust case and light weight design accomplish the exceptional features of this new generation instrument 1 1 SVAN 956 as Vibration Meter amp Analyser e General
263. proper text to display it inversely using the A v or lt gt gt push buttons and then press the ENTER one The DELETE window is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt 5 gt one 7 4 1 Deleting files with the main results RESULT FILES In order to enter the window one has to press the ENTER push button on the inversely displayed RESULT FILES text of the DELETE sub list using the A lt A gt with lt SHIFT gt or with lt SHIFT gt push buttons The DELETE sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt 5 gt push button In order to enter the list of the saved result files in the flash memory one has to press the ENTER push button In the case when the result files were not saved in the memory the special message is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user The user should press any push button except the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt DELETE RESULT FILES u 2 LOGGER FILES gt ENTER gt SETUP FILES RESULT FILES selected to be deleted and the flash memory does not contain any file After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the RESULT FILES entering is impossible In such case the message is displayed and the instrument returns after few seconds to the DELETE sub list MEASU
264. r displays its name The help lines are placed at the display s bottom There are two ways of the current directory selection e the name edition in the DIR NAME line The default name consists of the day number and the month abbreviation The not existing directory will be created e the selection of the existing directory by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed in the line with the DIR NO text The name of the selected directory is displayed in the DIR NAME line The selection is confirmed after pressing the ENTER push button which closes the window and returns to the FILE list The return to this list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the selection is not confirmed The selection of the directory is obligatory during the initialisation process In this case also the lt ESC gt push button confirms the settings n n a n a n DIRECTORY DIRECTORY DIRECTORY DIRECTORY FREE SPACE 62977 KB FREE SPACE 629972 KB FREE SPACE 52992 KB A gt DIR HO 1 2 DIF HO 2602 DIR HO DIR 91 11JHH Please wait Counting files Edit directoru name Edit directoru name S5H Delete 5H z Inzert 5Hz Delete SH gt Insert Select directory FILE list the DIRECTORY window A Notice After connecting a USB memory stick to the device the paper sheet icon appears in the top of the display 7 36 SVAN 956 USER
265. r not to waste too much memory of the instruments when the self saving is not necessary SAVE OPTIONS SAVE OPTIONS RAM FILE RAM FILE REPLACE i REPLACE p AUTO SAVE 5 AUTO SRUE DIRECT SRUE DIRECT SAVE SAVE MAS SPECT SAVE MAS SPECT SAVE SPECT SAVE SPECT SAVE OPTIONS sub list the selection of the AUTO SAVE A Notice The AUTO SAVE function can be performed only in the case when the INTEGR PERIOD path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP is not less than 10 seconds If it is less than 10 seconds the measurement results not saved without any indication of that fact There is only one exception when the REP CYCLE path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP is equal to one the AUTO SAVE function is executed disregarding the value of the integration period The FILE NAME window is opened after switching on the AUTO SAVE function and pressing the ENTER push button After pressing the ESC push button the FILE NAME window is closed and the instrument returns to the SAVE OPTION but with the AUTO SAVE function switched off 7 8 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL SAVE OPTIONS FILE NAME SAVE OPTIONS RAM FILE 5 RAM FILE iL REPLACE REFLACE rc AUTO SRUE AUTO SRUE DIRECT SRUE DIRECT SRUE E 1 SAVE MAS SPECT SAVE SPECT L 1 SAVE SPECT SHi Delete 5 gt Insert SAVE SFECT 1 Displays during the execution of the AUTO SAVE switching on the
266. r to select this the user has to display inversely the LOGGER DEFRAGMENT text using the lt A gt or lt lt gt push button oa DEFRAGMENTATION FILES DEFRRGMEHT LOGGER DEFRAGMENT LOGGER DEFRAGMENT selected to the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation The DEFRAGMENTATION sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button In order to continue the execution of the function one has to press the ENTER push button The instrument requests the confirmation of the operation The next pressing of the lt gt push button when the NO option is selected causes the closing of the window and the return to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list The selection of the NO or YES option is possible using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button LOGGER DEFRAG LOGGER DEFRAG Are uou Are uou sure sure Confirmation windows during the execution of the LOGGER DEFRAGMENTATION operation After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is not possible In such case the message is displayed and after few seconds instrument returns to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list MEASUREMENT PROGRESS Display after the attempt
267. reasons It is not possible to save the results during the execution of the measurements In the case when the saving was done the name of the logger s file is presented in the bottom line of one profile display and the clock starts to show the real time The presentation mode is changed to one profile STATISTICS and LOGGER or FILE INFO if all of them are currently available after pressing the lt A gt or v push buttons ao JETE 69 EN rar i 00 01 BE File 200CT3s Displays during the measurement performed in LEVEL METER mode with the active LOGGER the first three and after saving the results the last one 6 1 3 Setting on off logger view LOGGER The possibility of the presentation of the measurement results which are saved in the logger on the instrument s display can be switched on or off placing or replacing the special character in the displayed inversely line with the LOGGER text by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the user has to press the lt gt push button This confirmation closes also the DISPLAY MODES sub list The sub list can be also closed after pressing the lt ESC gt push button but the settings made there are ignored a a DISPLAY MODES DISPLAY MODES SPECTRUM SPECTRUM 3 PROFILES 3 PROFILES FILE IMFO FILE IMFO Setting on and off the accessibility of LOGGER presentation mode The results sav
268. rence level of displacement signal 9 7 Parameters of remote communication REMOTE COMMUNICATION The REMOTE COMMUNICATION enables the user to select the type and set the packet size of the packet communication In order to enter the position the user has to select the REMOTE COMMUNICATION text in the SETUP list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER EXPOSURE TIME FERENCE LEVELS REMOTE COMMUNICATION SETUP list the REMOTE COMMUNICATION text highlighted displayed inversely 9 7 1 Selecting the type of remote communication TYPE The TYPE enables the user to select the type of the REMOTE COMMUNICATION Three options are available Off CONTINUOUS and PACKET The selection of the required option is made by lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation is made by pressing ENTER push button a a REMOTE COM COM REMOTE COM PACKET 1 24 PACKET REMOTE COMMUNICATION windows the TYPE selection 9 10 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 9 7 2 Setting the packet size of the remote communication PACKET In the case of the PACKET type it is possible to select the packet size The available options are 1024 512 256 128 and 64 The selection is made by the lt gt gt push buttons The confirmation is made by pressing the ENTER push button oa oa oa REMOTE COM REMOTE COM REMOTE COM
269. ress 7 27 Message in the case when the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is unnecessary 7 28 Execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION 7 28 Result of the LOGGER DEFRAGMENTATION operation nn eene nren trennen 7 28 CATALOGUE text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE list eee 7 28 CATALOGUE window when the memory is 7 29 Contents of the CATALOGUE window 2 222 01 1 10000000000000000000000 0500 sz 7 29 Exemplary result files associated with the same logger file amp LOG2 in the CATALOGUE window 7 30 FREE SPACE text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE list eee 7 30 FREE SPACE window after the execution of the DELETE ALL operation 7 30 FREE SPACE window with the number depending on the measurements and operations performed 7 31 SAVE SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE list eee 7 31 SAVE SETUP window inthe FILE hist 2 retire eerte e rt e e ne He duped ceeds 7 31 Display during the process of setting the character in the edited 7 31 Display during the selection of the character s position to be edited 7 32 Display during the selection of the character n
270. rformed with the active LOGGER envelope icon sess 6 6 Displays during the measurement performed in LEVEL METER mode with the active LOGGER the first three and after saving the results the last 0 1 eene enne 6 6 Setting on and off the accessibility of LOGGER presentation mode eee 6 6 Exemplary displays with the measurement results saved in the logger eene 6 7 Setting on and off the file description presentation 6 7 Exemplary contents of the FILE INFO windovw nennen rennen tenete tenete entren trennen nne 6 7 DISPLAY list with the DISPLAY SETUP selected n 6 8 DISPLAY SETUP windows in VLM in 1 1 and 1 3 OCTAVE b and in FFT 2244422212 6 8 Displays with the possible options of the vibration SCALE sese ene 6 8 Measurement results presented in linear mm s a and logarithmic dB b scale 6 8 Displays with the possible values of the DYNAMIC enne enne 6 9 Displays with the results stored in the logger presented with different DYNAMIC parameter 6 9 DISPLAY SCALE windows the X ZOOM selection
271. rkish version of the user interface For activation of the Russian version of the user interface the special code has to be entered SVAN 956 USER MANUAL L _ ENTER CODE ENTER CODE 1 FLEMISH a 411 FRAHCAIS VALID CODE MAGYAR SH Delete SH Insert PRESS ANY KEY SOMKCLRNGURGED _ ___ ___ M S39EPhH FLEMISH J FRANCAIS 0 I 1 POLSKI CURRENT pedal TA ros 1 P TURKISH m BATAPE Displays with the Russian version of the user interface available only on some markets 9 2 Return to the factory settings CLEAR SETUP The CLEAR SETUP enables the user to return to the default set up of the instrument In order to enter the position the user has to select the CLEAR SETUP text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER CURRENT REFERENCE LEWELS SETUP list the CLEAR SETUP text highlighted displayed inversely After entering this position the request for the confirmation is displayed The proper answer for the request is selected by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The instrument returns to the default set up af
272. roller is awaken and the power consumption is the lower one lt ENTER gt USE EH USB DISK SRT RECORDIHG WAVE RECORDING EVENT RECORDING LISB H ST PORT SETUP list with the USB HOST PORT selected and this window with the activated RS232 The user has to be sure that the RS232 is activated path MENU SETUP USB HOST 5232 before starting printing reports Additionally in the RS232 list path MENU SETUP RS232 the user has to select the proper speed of the transmission and the parameter called TIME OUT RS232 RS232 BAUD RATE BALD RATE ENTER Time OUT 1s TIME OUT T MODE SIGHAL GENERATOR SETUP list with the RS232 selected and the exemplary contents of this window 8 1 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The RS 232 interface transmission BAUD RATE speed can be selected from the following available values 1200 bits second 2400 bits s 4800 bits s 9600 bits s 19200 bits s 38000 bits s 57600 bits s or 115200 bits s The selection is made by means of the lt gt gt push buttons The transmission speed should correspond to the one selected in a printer The other RS 232 transmission parameters are fixed to 8 bits for data No parity amp 1 Stop bit The default value of the TIME OUT parameter is equal to one but it can be too short period for the printers which are not too fast In such case this parameter has to be increased The description of the
273. s m s etc The selection is done by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing the lt 5 gt push button the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored VIBRATION UNITS VIBRATION UNITS 1 1 METRIC METRIC VIBRATION UNITS windows with the available positions 9 18 Warnings selection WARNINGS The WARNINGS enables the user to select the messages which could be displayed during the operation of the instrument In order to enter the window the user has to select the WARNINGS text in the SETUP list using the v lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER This window contains only one position SETUP SIGHAL GENERATOR FILTER WIBRATION LIHITS SETUP list the WARNINGS text highlighted displayed inversely 9 18 1 Saving the measurement results in a file RESULTS NOT SAVED In order to switch on the displaying of the message the user has to place by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the special character in the warning s position The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of a change made in the position or lt ESC gt push button ignoring a change made the
274. s or 115200 bits s The selection is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons 9 12 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The other RS 232 transmission parameters are fixed to 8 bits for data No parity amp 1 Stop bit The selected value has to be confirmed by pressing the ENTER push button which causes the simultaneous return to the SETUP list All settings are ignored after the return to the SETUP list by pressing the ESC push button oa L RSZZZ RSZZZ RSZZZ RSZZZ BAUD RATE BTS RATE BAUD RATE RATE H TIME QUT TIME OUT I BAUD RATE EIS GAUL RATE EE GAUL RATE REET RATE H H TIME OUT RS232 windows the possible settings of the BAUD RATE 9 10 2 Setting time limit for the performance of serial interface operation TIME OUT The TIME OUT value shown in the inversely displayed line is increased or decreased by one with each pressing the lt gt gt push buttons The step is increased decreased to ten after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons together with the lt SHIFT gt one The default value of this parameter is equal to one but it can be too short period for the printers which are not too fast In such case the TIME OUT parameter has to be increased The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of all changes
275. s displayed after the successful execution of stages of the operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and lt ALT gt one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list Clearing breue Please wait Deleted PRESS ANY KEY Execution of the DELETE ALL operation in the case of LOGGER FILES selected 7 5 3 Deleting all setup files SETUP FILES In order to activate the position the user has to place the special character in the line with the SETUP FILES text using the lt gt gt push button The DELETE ALL sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button In order to enter the DELETE ALL window one has to press the lt ENTER gt push button a a DELETE ALL DELETE ALL RESULT FILES 1 FILES 2 LOGGER FILES 1 LOGGER FILES 1 SETUP FILES SETUP FILES Press ENTER to DELETE Press ENTER to DELETE SETUP FILES selected to the execution of the DELETE ALL operation After pressing the lt ENTER gt push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the execution of the DELETE ALL operation is not possible In such case the message is displayed for a few seconds and the instruments returns to the FILE list 7 23 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL MEASUREMENT PROGRESS Dis
276. s made for the desired execution of the TIMER function sese 9 18 Counting down during the warming up of the instrument after switching 9 18 Displays during the executing of the TIMER function timer icon is 9 18 SETUP list the USB HOST PORT text highlighted displayed 9 19 Displays in the USB HOST 9 19 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Displays during the entering of the access code to SRT RECORDING WAVE RECORDING or EVENT RECORDING cic css tte et eret e one utetur e ERE SE 9 19 Displays with the different USB disk warnings esee nennen nennen trennen nen 9 20 Contents of the DIRECTORY Wino Wein een ree rr er t ERR FRE EE E ere eria 9 21 Displays during the IrDA interface connection nennen enne netten teneret tren nennen 9 21 SETUP list the USER FILTERS text highlighted displayed inversely 9 22 USER FILTERS windows REAL TIME FILTERS selected a SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS selected b 9 22 USER FILTERS windows REAL TIME FILTERS selected 9 22 Displays during the entering of the access code to REAL TIME FILTERS eene 9 22 REAL TIME FILTERS windows the filter selection nenne enhn ennt enhn 9 23 R1
277. s the ENTER one The DELETE ALL sub list consists of three positions RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES and SETUP FILES DELETE ALL text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE list 7 5 1 Deleting all result files RESULT FILES In order to activate the position the user has to place the special character in the line with the RESULT FILES text using the lt gt gt push button The DELETE ALL sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the ESC push button In order to enter the DELETE ALL window one has to press the ENTER push button oa L1 DELETE ALL DELETE ALL RESULT FILES RESULT FILES L GBER FILES 1 LOGGER FILES if SETUP FILES 3 FILES 3 Press ENTER to DELETE Press ENTER to DELETE RESULT FILES selected to the execution of the DELETE ALL operation SVAN 956 USER MANUAL After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the execution of the DELETE ALL operation is not possible In such case the message is displayed for a few seconds and the instruments returns to the FILE list MEASUREMENT PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If the measurements are not performed the instrument requests the confirmation of the operation after entering this window after pressing the ENTER push b
278. s to be repeated Inf 1 1000 LOGGER off on saving measurement results in instrument s logger memory e LOGGER STEP available values of the step with which the measurement results are saved in an instrument s logger 2 ms 1h e LOGGER NAME editing the name of the logger s file gt MEASUREMENT RANGE range of the vibration level measurements LOW RMS HP 1 41 mm s 100 m s 31 6 mm s 141 m s in the case of vibration measurements HIGH 3 4 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL RMS HP 10 mm s 708 m s 316 mm s gt 1 km s in the case of vibration measurements PROFILE 1 sub list FILTER available digital weighting filters used in the first profile during the measurements o R2 R1 2 HP1 HP3 HP10 Vel Vel3 Vel10 VelMF Dil Dil3 01110 W Bxy W Bz H A W Bc KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb available filters in vibration measurements DETECTOR available values of the detector time constant used in the first profile o 100ms 125ms 200ms 500ms 1 0s 2 0s 5 0s 10 0s available detector time constants LOGGER available measurement results which has to be saved in the instrument s logger from the first profile setting possible only when LOGGER is switched on path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP LOGGER On o PEAK P P MAX RMS PROFILE 2 sub list FILTER available digital weighting filters used the second profile during the measurements o
279. sTRRT DELAY lg START DELAY IMTEBR PERIOD REP CYCLE Inf LOGGER Off MEASUREMENT SETUP windows the setting of the INTEGR PERIOD with 10 hours step Additionally the predefined periods 1m 5 m 15m 1h 8 h and 24h which are enumerated in the standards are also available by pressing the lt lt gt push button or lt lt gt with SHIFT these values are placed in the mentioned above sequence on the left in relation to 1 s 5 SETUP MERHSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP START DELAY ls srRRT DELAY 1 sTRRT DELAY ls BECH IHMTEGE PERIOD IHTEGR PERIOD Int REP CYCLE Inf CYCLE Inf 1 OFF LOGGER 1 OFF SVAN 956 USER MANUAL oa HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP HERSUR SETUP START DELAY D IMTEGE PERIOD NUN a In REP CYCLE LOGGER OFF Displays during setting the predefined INTEGR PERIOD sequence A Notice In the case of switching on the AUTO SAVE function the minimum value of the integration period should be equal to 10 seconds If the user wants to switch on AUTO SAVE option path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS AUTO SAVE the integration period value has to be greater or equal than 10 seconds When AUTO SAVE option was switched on and new entered integration period value is less than 10 seconds AUTO SAVE option switches off and INT PERIOD TOO SHORT AUTO SAVE DISABLED message appears on the display IHT PERIOD TOO
280. second push button must be pressed in parallel 2 1 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL e as 2nd Fun this push button can be pressed and released before pressing the second one or pressed in parallel while operating 2nd Fun mode see the following notice with the second push button The lt SHIFT gt push button pressed in conjunction with the ALT one enables the user to enter the Markers on the plots during the measurement A Notice The operation of this push button can be set as the Shift mode or the 2nd Fun mode in the SHIFT position path MENU SETUP SHIFT MODE SHIFT see description of the SETUP list lt ALT gt This push button enables one to choose the third push button function in case of lt SAVE gt and lt PAUSE gt push buttons In order to select the third function the user must press the lt ALT gt and the second push button simultaneously The lt ALT gt push button pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one enables the user to enter the Markers on the plots during the measurement A Notice The simultaneous pressing of the ALT and START STOP push buttons switches the instrument on and off START STOP This push button enables one to start the measurement process when the instrument is not measuring or to stop it when the instrument is in course of the measurement It is also possible to set such mode of this push button in which in order to start or st
281. sh button which simultaneously closes the current display The MEASURE TRIGGER window is closed ignoring any changes made after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button 5 4 1 4 Switching the triggering on and off TRIGGER The triggering of the measurements TRIGGER can be switched off using the lt lt gt push button MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER window TRIGGER switched off The triggering is switched on if one of its five modes is selected SLOPE SLOPE LEVEL LEVEL or GRAD The selection of the triggering mode is performed using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons If the instrument works with the triggering switched on the Antenna icon is flashing on the display in the case when the triggering condition was not fulfilled 1 19 Displays during the measurements while the triggering condition is not fulfilled In the case when the SLOPE is selected the measurement starts when the arising signal will pass the level determined in the LEVEL In the case when the SLOPE is selected the measurement starts when the falling down signal will pass the level determined in the LEVEL The measurement 5 12 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL is stopped when the conditions set in the MEASUREMENT SETUP sub list are fulfilled after pressing the START STOP push button or after receiving the proper control code remotely oa Ll MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGE
282. sh buttons together with the lt 5 gt The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing the ENTER with the confirmation of a change made in the position or lt 5 gt push button ignoring a change made in the position The exemplary warning is presented below The return to the programme execution is done after pressing any push button except the lt SHIFT gt and lt ALT gt n a USB DISK FREE SP 15 PRESS ANY Display with USB DISK FREE SPACE warning 9 29
283. signal 4 3 3 History of the calibration LAST CALIBRATION 4 3 4 Automatic reading of a vibration transducer parameters TEDS MEASUREMENT PARAMETERS SETTING INPUT 5 1 Selection of measurement parameters MEASUREMENT SETUP 5 1 1 Setting time delay before the start of measurements START DELAY 5 1 2 Setting the integration period INTEGR PERIOD 5 1 3 Setting the number of repetition of measurement cycles REP CYCLE 5 1 4 Logger functionality switching On Off LOGGER 5 1 5 Setting time period between two writings to the logger s file LOGGER STEP 5 1 6 Logger file name edition LOGGER NAME 5 2 Measurement range setting MEASUREMENT RANGE 5 3 Setting parameters in a profile PROFILE x 5 3 1 Weighting filter selection in a profile FILTER 5 3 2 RMS detector selection DETECTOR 5 3 3 PEAK result selection for saving in a logger s file LOGGER PEAK 5 3 4 MAX result selection for saving in a logger s file LOGGER MAX 5 3 5 result selection for saving a logger s file LOGGER P P 2 1 2 1 2 6 3 1 3 1 3 21 3 23 3 27 3 27 3 28 4 1 5 8 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 10 5 11 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 5 3 6 RMS result selection for saving in a logger s file LOGGER RMS 5 11 5 4 Triggering mode and parameters selection TRIGGER SETUP 5 11 5 4 1 Trigger parameters setting MEASURE TRIGGER 5 12 5 4 2 Trigger parameters in logger setting LOGGER TRIGGER 5 15 5 4 3 Trigger parameters for recorder setting RECORDER TRIGGER 5
284. ss to the SAVE SAVE NEXT function DIRECT SAVE 7 10 7 2 5 Saving maximum values in the spectrum SAVE MAX SPECT 7 11 7 2 6 Saving the lowest values in the spectrum SAVE MIN SPECT 7 12 7 3 Loading the files with the measurement results LOAD 7 12 7 4 Removing a file with the measurement results from memory DELETE 7 15 7 4 1 Deleting files with the main results RESULT FILES 7 15 7 4 2 Deleting logger files LOGGER FILES 7 17 7 4 3 Deleting files with setup settings SETUP FILES 7 19 7 5 Removing all files with measurement results from memory DELETE ALL 7 21 7 5 1 Deleting all result files RESULT FILES 7 21 7 5 2 Deleting all logger files LOGGER FILES 7 22 7 5 3 Deleting all setup files SETUP FILES 7 23 7 6 Merging file space DEFRAGMENTATION 7 25 7 6 1 Merging result and setup files memory FILES DEFRAGMENTATION 7 25 7 6 2 Merging logger files memory LOGGER DEFRAGMENT 7 27 7 7 Checking the contents of the memory CATALOGUE 7 28 7 8 Checking the free space in the memory FREE SPACE 7 30 7 9 Saving setup files in the instrument s memory SAVE SETUP 7 31 7 10 Loading the files with the setup settings LOAD SETUP 7 34 7 11 Connecting the external USB memory stick DIRECTORY 7 36 7 12 Copying files to the external USB memory stick COPY FILES TO USB 7 37 7 13 Moving files to the USB memory stick MOVE FILES TO USB 7 38 REPORTS PRINTING REPORT 8 1 8 1 Edition of the user s text to be added to the reports TITLE 8 3 8 2 Printi
285. ssage is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user The user should press any push button except the lt SHIFT gt and lt gt DELETE RESULT FILES u 2 LOGGER FILES gt lt gt gt SETUP FILES SETUP FILES selected to be deleted and the instrument s memory does not contain any file After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the SETUP FILES entering is impossible In such case the message is displayed and the instrument returns after few seconds to the DELETE sub list 7 19 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL MEASUREMENT PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress The data about the existing in the instrument setup files are displayed after successful opening the FILE DELETE LOGGER FILES window pressing the ENTER push button The current number of the file and the total number of the saved setup files is displayed in the first line of the window The date and time of the SAVE SETUP operation is displayed in the last two lines respectively The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The first file is available after pressing the with lt SHIFT gt push button or v with lt SHIFT gt and the last one is displayed after pressing the lt gt g
286. strument starts the measurement L RD HO FILES Display during the execution of the LOAD operation The current number of the file and the total number of the saved files is displayed in the first line of the LOAD window The name of the file is displayed in the second line its current number is presented in the first line The name of the file suggests the operation the file was created in The names in which the first character is are coming from the AUTO SAVE function The file with the default name Timer is coming from the AUTO SAVE function executed in the TIMER operation The other names suggest the SAVE SAVE NEXT function The type of the current file LEVEL METER 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE FFT or ENVELOPING and the mode VIBR are given in the third line If during the measurements which results are saved in the file the logger file was also created its name is displayed in the fourth line A Notice The logger file can be deleted from the instrument s memory in the FILE DELETE LOGGER FILES window and this deleting operation does not modify the contents of the fourth line of the LOAD window The date and time of the SAVE operation are displayed in the fifth and sixth line respectively The change of the current file with the unit step can be done after pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The first file is available after pressing the lt lt gt with lt SHIFT gt push button or v with
287. sub list If all types are selected simultaneously and the logger result and setup are saved only Clearing operation is performed but two times one time in logger files memory and one time in result and setup files memory After clearing all memory the defragmentation is not done The memory merging is done only in the case of setup and results memory as these two different types of files are saved together in the same space L Clearing Clearing I sr Flease wait Flease wait Deleted PRESS ANY KEW Execution of the DELETE ALL operation for all type files simultaneously 7 24 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 7 6 Merging file space DEFRAGMENTATION The DEFRAGMENTATION is used to make the file memory continuous All new files are saved starting from the beginning of the free memory space The memory occupied by the deleted file assuming that the file was not the last one remains unused for the next files saving After the removing a file the files memory becomes discontinuous with unused parts which cannot be utilized in the future The situation changes after the process called defragmentation During this process the files saved in the files memory are moved in order to obtain the continuous occupied space The files merging is performed separately for two parts of the instrument s memory the FILES DEFRAGMENT is used to join the result and setup files and LOGGER DEFRAGMENT is used
288. t s FLASH DISC can be done by means of the FILE list In order to open the FILE list the user has to press the lt MENU gt push button e select from the main list using the lt A gt v lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons the FILE text highlight it inversely e press the ENTER push button Main list the FILE text highlighted displayed inversely The FILE list contains the following items SAVE SAVE OPTIONS LOAD DELETE DELETE ALL DEFRAGMENTATION CATALOGUE FREE SPACE SAVE SETUP LOAD SETUP DIRECTORY COPY FILES TO USB MOVE FILES TO USB enables one to save the measurement results as a file in the instrument s memory enables one to set the options of the measurement result savings enables one to load to the working space of the instruments memory the measurement results saved in a file enables one to delete a selected file from the instrument s memory enables one to delete all files from the instrument s memory enables one to consolidate the flash memory after deleting some files from it enables one to overview the catalogue of the files saved in the instrument s memory informs the user about the capacity of the instrument s memory still available for storing the measurement results enables one to save the setup as a file in the instrument memory enables one to load to the working space of the instrument s memory the selected setup saved in a file this position ap
289. t with lt SHIFT gt push button or lt A gt with lt SHIFT gt FILE HO 2711 FILE SETS SETU SETU SETUP SETUP DATE 28 MAR 2007 DATE 2 APR 2087 DATE 2 APR 2007 DATE 2 APR 2007 TIME 15 25 58 TIME 14 45 34 TIME 14 46 02 TIME 14 46 28 Selection of the SETUP FILES to be deleted The selected file is deleted after pressing the ENTER push button The message is displayed after the successful end of the operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the DELETE sub list gt ENTER gt gt ANY PUSH BUTTON gt gt 55 PRESS ANY KEY DELETE DELETE FILE NO NENEZU RESULT FILES gt ENTER gt FILE HAME 5 2 LOGGER FILES SETUF SETUP DATE B2 APR 2667 TIME 14 45 28 Execution of the RESULT FILES deletion After the execution of the setup files removing from the memory usually the FREE SPACE memory path MENU FILE FREE SPACE rests the same as before the deletion but TOTAL AVAILABLE memory is increased It is because erased file was somewhere in the file s space The file is no longer accessible but the recuperated memory is still unused for the next saving This memory becomes available after the defragmentation process path MENU FILE DEFRAGMENTATION FILES DEFRAGMENT in which
290. t A gt or v push button HERSUR SETUP LOGGER MRME amp LOG4 MEASUREMENT SETUP window the INTEGR PERIOD position accessible The change of the value in a selected position is performed by pressing the lt lt gt or lt gt gt push buttons HERSUR SETUP MEASUR SETUP START DELAY START DELAY INTEGR ER ort Displays with the accessed INTEGR PERIOD position after pressing the lt lt gt or lt gt gt push buttons respectively The ENTER push button is used for the confirmation of the selection in a position and for closing the opened sub list The sub list is closed ignoring any changes made in a sub list by pressing the lt 5 gt push button MEASUREMENT SETUP MERSUREMEHT RAHGE PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 1 PROFILE 3 i Profileci gt TRIGGER SETUP Displays after three consecutive pressing of the lt ESC gt push button from the MEASUR SETUP sub list As it was mentioned some of the sub lists end with the windows informing the user about the state of the instrument available memory not existing files or loggers standards fulfilled by the unit etc In order to close such window the user has to press the lt 5 gt push button 3 2 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL mo FREE SPACE FILES FREE SPACE CATALOGUE Displays during and after the accessing the FREE SPACE window path MENU FILE FREE SPACE In the instrument there are also windows which are used for
291. t possible to calibrate the instrument during the execution of the measurements It is possible to open different lists sub lists but the positions in these lists are not displayed inversely and so not accessible The Loudspeaker icon indicates that the instrument is in the measurement process In order to change the sensitivity the measurement must be finished BY SEHSITIUITY SENSITIVITY Displays with the SENSITIVITY positions path MENU FUNCTION CALIBRATION BY SENSITIVITY not accessible 2 Set the sensitivity of the accelerometer taken from its calibration certificate using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and then press the lt ENTER gt one The calibration factor is calculated after pressing the ENTER push button in the relation to 10 0 mV ms In order to avoid the calculation the user has to leave the CALIBRATION without pressing ENTER For the sensitivity of the accelerometer higher than 10 0 mV ms the calibration factor is negative oa SENSITIVITY BY SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY CAL FACTOR C 28 046 SENSITIVITY CAL FACTOR C 8 686 a b Displays during setting the sensitivity higher than 10 0 mV ms a and after pressing the lt ENTER gt push button with the calibration factor calculated b 4 3 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL For the sensitivity of the accelerometer lower than 10 0 mV ms the calibration factor is positive oa oa BY SENSI
292. te 5H z Insert 5Hz Delete SH Insert Displays with all available characters cont 8 3 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 8 2 Printing of the measurement results PRINT RESULTS The PRINT RESULTS enables the user to print the report on the attached printer or to send out the report to a PC using the SvanPC software and the USB interface In order to enter the position the user has to select the PRINT RESULT text in the REPORT list using the A v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one THLE PRINT FILE PRINT LOGGER PRINT USER FILTERS a LERINT CATALOGUE REPORT windows with the PRINT RESULTS selected After pressing the ENTER push button the instrument checks its current state In the case when the measurements are performed the printing is impossible and the message is displayed MEASUREMENT PROGRESS Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress In the case when a measurement was already performed and a result is available the message presented below is displayed A PRINT RESULTS Printing Display in the REPORT list the execution of the PRINT RESULTS When the message is on the display the data are transferred from the instrument to the attached printer The instrument returns to the REPORT list after transferring all data The exemplary report printed in A5 format path MENU
293. ter is currently edited The lt lt gt lt gt gt lt lt gt lt gt gt pressed together with lt SHIFT gt push buttons are used for editing the name which cannot exceed eight characters SAVE FILE SS0CT SAUE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Delete SH Insert Display during the process of setting the character in the edited name One can select the position of the character in the edited text using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons SAVE SAVE FILE FILE 2 SAVE SAVE SAVE FILE 280WT8 SAVE SAVE FILE 28XCT8 SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIF Press ESC to SKIF S5H Delete SH Insert Delete Insert Press ENTER to SAVE Press ENTER to SAVE Press ESC to SKIP Press ESC to SKIF SH Delete SH Insert 1 SH Insert 7 3 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL Display during the selection of the character s position to be edited The available ASCII characters can be changed using the A or v push button pressed together with the lt SHIFT gt one The subsequent digits underline big letters and space appear on the display in the inversely displayed position after each pressing of the mentioned above push buttons SAVE FILE SAVE SAVE FILE SAVE SAVE FILE Se0cTa SAVE SAVE FIL
294. ter pressing the ENTER push button in the case when the answer YES was chosen a CLEAR SETUP CLEAR SETUP Are you Are you sure EM sure Displays with the request for the confirmation for the CLEAR SETUP execution During the clearing process the message WAIT is displayed The following message is displayed after the return to the default settings and the instrument waits for the user s reaction SETUP CLEARED PRESS ANY Displays during and after the execution of the CLEAR SETUP function The window is closed and the instrument returns to the SETUP list after pressing any push button with an exception of the lt SHIFT gt and the lt ALT gt one 9 4 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 9 3 Setting parameters of the Ext port EXTERNAL SETUP The EXTERNAL I O SETUP enables the user to select the available functionality of the Ext I O port In order to enter the window the user has to select the EXTERNAL I O SETUP text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one SETUP list the EXTERNAL I O SETUP text highlighted In order to select a value in a position of the sub list the lt lt gt lt gt gt should be pressed The position of the sub list is changed after pressing the lt A gt v push buttons In order to confirm the selection the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list Aft
295. the LOGGER selection 5 7 Selection of enveloping parameters ENVELOPING The ENVELOPING appears in the INPUT list when the ENVELOPING function is selected path MENU FUNCTION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION ENVELOPING This sub list is opened after the selection of the ENVELOPING text from the INPUT list by means of the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing the ENTER one 5 23 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL The ENVELOPING consists of the parameters which influence the calculation and saving the results of the ENVELOPING FILTER BAND and LINES The ENVELOPING window is closed ignoring any changes made in there after pressing any time the lt ESC gt push button IHPUT ENVELOPING MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE PROFILE 1 PROFILE 2 PROFILE 3 ENVELOPING selected in the INPUT list and the ENVELOPING window opened 5 7 1 Selecting the weighting filter during the enveloping calculation FILTER The FILTER influences the calculations of ENVELOPING function The selection of this parameter is made by means of the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The proper BAND value changes decreases automatically when selected band width is too wide for the selected centre frequency value The confirmation of the change made in the line requires pressing the ENTER push button which simultaneously closes the window The following weighting filters are available in case of enveloping function
296. the SLOPE mode 10 dB step down MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER z LEVEL lt gt gt JTRIGGER LEWEL lt gt gt TRIGGER LEWEL SOURCE 5 1 SOURCE ORMSCII 2 LEUEL ORMSCII i LEVEL ERNEUT MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the LEVEL mode 1 dB step up 5 14 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL oa MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER HEASURE TRIGGER GRAD TRIGGER GRAD TRIGGER GRAD GRAD s 5012 SOURCE s RMSCI SOURCE RMECI ORMSCI EL LEUEL ERIGI LEUEL PEE WEL GRADIENT 16dB ms GRADIENT 16dB ms GRADIENT 16dB ms GRADIENT 16dB ms MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the LEVEL selection in the GRAD mode 1 dB step down 5 4 1 4 Setting the speed of the triggering signal changes GRADIENT The speed of the triggering signal changes GRADIENT can be set in 1 dB millisecond step or 10 dB millisecond steps from 1 dB ms to 100 dB ms range using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons or lt lt gt lt gt gt with SHIFT2 Ll oa HERHSURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER GRAD GRAD lt gt gt 4 lt SHIFT gt TRIGGER GRAD SOURCE 541 gt ORMSCID LEUEL slm ms slm mis 541 gt 116 46 mis MEASURE TRIGGER windows with the GRADIENT selection 1 dB ms and 10 dB ms step up 5 4 2 Trigger para
297. the display lt gt lt gt pressed together e activate markers 2 and 3 lt lt gt lt gt gt The lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons pressed in conjunction or sequence with the lt SHIFT gt enable one in particular to 2 3 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL e speed up the changing of the numerical values of the parameters i e the step is increased from 1 to 10 in the setting of START DELAY path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP STAHT DELAY e insert or delete a character in the text edition modes Some other possible reactions of the instrument on the pressing of these push buttons will be described in details in the following chapters lt A gt Y The lt A gt v push buttons enable in particular to e change the mode of result s presentation e select the proper character from the list in the text edition mode switch the active sub list in a list e programme the Real Time Clock RTC and TIMER e activate markers 1 and 4 Some other possible reactions of the instrument on the pressing of these push buttons will be described in details in the following chapters lt A gt v The lt A gt v push buttons pressed in conjunction or in sequence with the lt SHIFT gt enable one in particular to e change the relation between the Y axis and X axis of all plots presented on the screen e switch the active profile in PROFILES mode of results presentation Some other possibl
298. the function is not available is displayed and the instrument once more waits for the reaction of the user a INVALID CODE PRESS ANY Display after the unsuccessful verification of the access code After pressing the ENTER or the lt ESC gt push button the instrument returns to the FUNCTION list displaying the list of the functions implemented in the unit cf the first Figure in this chapter After successful verification of the access code the windows described above are no more displayed Once activated function is always available 3 6 Memory organisation available measurement results can be stored in the internal FLASH type memory of the instrument 32 MB or in the external USB Memory Stick when the optional USB HOST controller is installed in the instrument The internal memory of the instrument is divided into two separate parts One part is dedicated for saving the result and setup files and its size is equal to 16 252 428 bytes The second part is used for saving the logger files and its size is equal to 15 859 224 bytes To save a result file the user has to choose one of the available options SAVE NEXT path MENU FILE SAVE or pressing ENTER and lt ALT gt together SAVE path MENU FILE SAVE or pressing ENTER and ALT together AUTO SAVE path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS or DIRECT SAVE path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS To save a setup file the user has to choose SAVE SETUP opti
299. the user about the multiplier for the horizontal axis of the graphical modes of the result s presentation available values in 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE analyser 3x 4x 5x GRID available values or V SPECTRUM VIEW in the case of 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE or FFT analysis e VIEW available spectrum views NORMAL FULL EXTENDED e TYPE available types of spectrum views AVERAGED INSTANTANEOUS MAX MIN e MAX position is accessible if in TYPE position AVERAGED or INSTANTANEOUS were selected available values or N e MIN position is accessible if in TYPE position AVERAGED or INSTANTANEOUS were selected available values or N SPECTRUM TYPE available spectrum types in the case of vibration only ACCELERATION VELOCITY DISPLACEMENT TOTAL VALUES in the case of 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE vibration analysis e TOTAL 1 available positions in the case of vibration measurements o FILTER available values Z S1 S2 S3 o TYPE it appears when FILTER different than Z available values ACC VEL DIL o CAL F it appears as above available values 60 dB 60 dB e TOTAL 2 available positions o FILTER available values PR 2 S1 S2 S3 o TYPE it appears when FILTER different than PR 2 available values ACC VEL DIL o CAL F it appears as above available values 60 dB 60 dB e TOTAL 3 available positions o FILTER available values PR 3 S1 S2 S3 o TYPE it appears when FILTER different than PR 3 available values ACC
300. tion during measurement in progress 7 24 Displays with the confirmation window during the execution of the DELETE ALL operation 7 24 Execution of the DELETE ALL operation in the case of SETUP FILES selection eee 7 24 Execution of the DELETE ALL operation for all type files simultaneously eene 7 24 DEFRAGMENTATION text highlighted displayed inversely in the FILE list eee 7 25 FILES DEFRAGMENT selected to the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation 7 25 Confirmation windows during the execution of the FILES DEFRAGMENTATION operation 7 26 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress 7 26 Message in the case when the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is unnecessary 7 26 Execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation eren 7 26 Result of the FILES DEFRAGMENTATION operation essere nennen nennen rennen tenete trennen 7 27 LOGGER DEFRAGMENT selected to the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation 7 27 Confirmation windows during the execution of the LOGGER DEFRAGMENTATION operation 7 27 Display after the attempt to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in prog
301. to enter the position the user has to select the REFERENCE LEVELS text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER one The selection of a parameter which level has to be set is done by means of the lt A gt v push buttons SETUP DAY TIME LIMITS I MICROPHONE SETUP list the REFERENCE LEVELS text highlighted displayed inversely 9 6 1 Setting the reference level of the acceleration signal ACC In the ACC position the user can set the reference level of the acceleration signal It is possible to set this level from 1 ums to 100 ums with 1 ums step pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The step can be increased to 10 ums pressing the lt SHIFT gt with the lt gt gt push buttons In order to confirm the setting the ENTER push button has to be pressed Such pressing closes the sub list After pressing the lt ESC gt push button the sub list is also closed but all changes which were made are ignored a a REFERENCE LEUELSIIEEFEREHCE LEUELS REFEREHCE LEVELS REFERENCE LEVELS windows the reference level setting of acceleration signal 9 6 2 Setting the reference level of the velocity signal VEL In the VEL position the user can set the reference level of the velocity signal It is possible to set this level from 1 nms to 100 nms with 1 nms step pressing the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons step
302. to perform an unavailable operation during measurement in progress If the measurements not performed after pressing the ENTER push button on the active YES option the instrument checks whether the used logger files memory is continuous or not If this memory is continuous the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is not executed and the special message is displayed The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one and after pressing a push button it returns to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list 7 27 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL DEFRAGMENTATION Unnecessary PRESS ANY Message in the case when the execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation is unnecessary If there are conditions to execute the DEFRAGMENTATION operation it is done and the current progress is shown on the display After the successful execution the special message is displayed and the instrument waits for the reaction of the user Any push button should be then pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and ALT one After pressing push button the instrument returns to the DEFRAGMENTATION sub list Defragmentation Clearing gt gt DEFRAGMENTATION Please wait Please wait finished PRESS ANY KEY Execution of the DEFRAGMENTATION operation The displays below illustrate the results of the LOGGER DEFRAGMENT after the execution the LOGGER FREE SPACE and LOG
303. to save the maximal values of the spectrum occurred during the performed analysis available values N or SAVE MIN SPECT it enables the user to save the minimal values of the spectrum occurred during the performed analysis available values N or LOAD enables one to load to the working space of the instrument s memory the measurement results saved in a file the NO FILES text is displayed in the case when the instrument s memory is empty gt DELETE it enables the user to verify the list of files in the memory and to delete the selected one from RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES SETUP FILES lists the NO FILES text is displayed in the case when the instrument s memory is empty DELETE ALL it enables the user to delete all files saved in the instrument s memory user can choose to delete either RESULT FILES LOGGER FILES or SETUP FILES the confirmation is required before the erasing of all files Are you sure gt DEFRAGMENTATION sub list FILES DEFRAGMENT it enables the user to recover the memory which was previously used by the deleted files the confirmation is required before the execution of this operation Are you sure LOGGER DEFRAGMENT it enables the user to recover the memory which was previously used by the deleted logger files the confirmation is required before the execution of this operation Are you sure 3 13 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 8 14 text DEFRAGMENTATION unnec
304. tton L TIMER TIMER TIMER TIMER MODE REGULAR MODE REGULAR MODE REGULAR MODE REGULAR START DAY 85 MAR START DAY 85 MAR START DAY 85 MAR START DAY 85 MAR START HOUR START HOUR START HOUR START HOUR REPETITION 99 REPETITION Maa REPETITION 11 55 REPETITION 11 2 TIMER windows setting REPETITION parameter 9 14 6 Description of the exemplary timer function execution The TIMER function is used to programme the instrument s switch on at the given time and perform the measurements with the parameters set in the INPUT sub list Let us assume that the user wants to switch on the instrument the 1 of February at 13 25 measure vibration during 10 seconds without using logger and save the results in a file RES2 In order to do this the user has to set the parameters of the TIMER function path MENU SETUP TIMER the measurement parameters path MENU INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP activate the AUTO SAVE function path MENU FILE SAVE OPTIONS name the file the FILE NAME window is opened after switching on the AUTO SAVE function and finally switch off the instrument HERSUE SETUP SAVE OPTIONS FILE NAME BEEE FILE iL MODE EMS REPLRCE iC TART REP CYC DAY B1 FEB AUTO SAVE B START HOUR 13 25 G DIRECT SAVE SAVE MAX SPECT SAVE SPECT lt 1 SH Insert
305. user to introduce the coefficients of the filters REAL TIME FILTERS e Rx R1 R2 R3 TYPE available values HIGHPASS BANDPASS LOWPASS o LFC 3 dB low frequency corner at 3 dB available for HIGHPASS and BANDPASS with the values 100 00 Hz 10 00 kHz o HFC 3 dB high frequency corner at 3 dB position available only for BANDPASS and LOWPASS with the values 100 00 Hz 10 00 kHz SPECTRUM BASED FILTER e VIEW it enables the user to select which filter used 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis should be viewed the available options are S1 S2 S3 and any other transmitted to the instrument from a PC by means of the interface e EDIT it enables the user to select which filters used in 1 1 OCTAVE or 1 3 OCTAVE analysis should be edited the available options are as follows S1 S2 S3 or any other transmitted to the instrument from a PC by means of the interface After pressing the ENTER push button the Sx S1 S2 S3 sub list is opened containing the values of the filters the user can set the values of correcting coefficients for all 1 3 OCTAVE filters 0 80 Hz available values of 0 8 Hz centre frequency filter 100 0dB 100 0dB 20 0 kHz available values of 20 kHz centre frequency filter 100 0dB 100 0dB e CLEAR enables the user to select which filters should be cleared the available options are as follows ALL S1 S2 S3 or any other VIBRATION UNITS sub list which has the meaning only for vibration measure
306. ush buttons ignoring all changes L EXT SETUP EXT SETUP EXT SETUP DIGITAL OUT MODE DIGITAL OUT MODE DIGITAL OUT FUNCTION ALARM PULSE ALARM PULSE FUMCTIOM ALARM PULSE ACTIVE LEVEL 100 ACTIVE LEVEL LOW ACTIVE LEVEL LOW SOURCE OURCE PEAK CIS OURCE PEAR CIS ALARM ALARM LEVEL IEE ALARM LEVEL EXTERNAL I O SETUP windows the ALARM LEVEL setting 9 4 Activation of human vibration filters HUMAN VIB FILT In the HUMAN VIBR FILT it is possible to activate the human vibration filters Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh Wg Wb which are not included in the standard set of the instrument This option can be bought together with the instrument or can be purchased by the user in the future In the latter case after selecting the HUMAN VIB FILT text in the SETUP list in vibration modes using the lt A gt v or lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons and pressing lt gt the user has to introduce special code for activation of the function After successful activation the HUMAN VIBRATION filters this text does not appear on the SETUP list any more and the instrument never more asks for the code SETUP CLEAR SETUP EXTERMAL 1 0 SETUP IEPE CURREHT REFERENCE LEVELS REMOTE SETUP list the HUMAN VIB text highlighted displayed inversely VALID CODE a ENTER CODE ENTER CO
307. utton After next pressing the lt ENTER gt push button when the NO option is selected the window is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list The selection of the NO or YES option is possible using the lt lt gt lt gt gt push buttons The return to the FILE list is also possible after pressing the lt ESC gt push button DELETE RLL DELETE RLL Displays with the confirmation window during the execution of the DELETE ALL operation All files from the selected type are deleted after the ENTER push button pressing when the YES option is selected The message is displayed after the successful execution of stages of the operation The instrument waits for the reaction of the user any push button should be pressed except the lt SHIFT gt and lt ALT gt one and after pressing a push button it returns to the FILE list Defragmentation Clearing I I Please wait Please wait Deleted PRESS ANY KEY Execution of the DELETE ALL operation in the case of RESULT FILES selection 7 5 2 Deleting all logger files LOGGER FILES In order to activate the position the user has to place the special character in the line with the LOGGER FILES text using the lt gt gt push button The DELETE ALL sub list is closed and the instrument returns to the FILE list after pressing the lt ESC gt push button In order to enter the DELETE ALL window has to press the ENTER push button
308. ved in the USB disk as well as in the instruments internal flash The IrDA is the wireless interface used for the communication between the instrument and a PC The connection of the IrDA converter results in displaying the info window and switching on the paper sheet icon at the left side of the upper line In the case of the unsuitable settings in the USB HOST PORT window or connecting wrong device another info window is displayed The transmission parameters are selected automatically during the negotiation process The fastest available speed equals to 115 200 kb s In this case the real speed is not bigger than 1 5 kB s The IrDA programming is based on a virtual COM port emulation in a PC D USB IrDA UHKHOHH STIraaun IrDA DEVICE PRESS ANY 55 ANY KEY Displays during the IrDA interface connection 9 21 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 9 16 Setting the coefficients of the user filters USER FILTERS The USER FILTERS position enables the user to introduce the values of the coefficients of the user filters In order to enter the position the user has to select the USER FILTERS text in the SETUP list using the lt A gt v or lt gt gt push buttons and press the ENTER The USER FILTERS sub list contains two positions REAL TIME FILTERS and SPECTRUM BASED FILTERS SETUP list the USER FILTERS text highlighted displayed inversely USER FILTERS USER FILTERS RERL TIME F
309. vibration measurements acceleration velocity and displacement and optionally meeting ISO 8041 2005 and ISO 10816 1 standards in the frequency range depends on the parameters of the attached accelerometer i e with DYTRAN 3185D general purpose transducer is equal to 2Hz 8 kHz parallel RMS VDV MTVV or MAX PEAK e 2 HP1 HP3 HP10 KB Wk Wd Wc Wj Wm Wh ISO 5349 Wg ISO 2631 Wb weighting filters e 1 1 OCTAVE and 1 3 OCTAVE real time analysis optional 15 filters with centre frequencies 1 Hz 16 kHz 1 IEC 61260 and 45 filters with centre frequencies 0 8 Hz 20 kHz Type 1 61260 e optional FFT spectra calculation 1920 lines in real time up to 22 4 kHz with Hanning rectangle flat top or Kaiser Bessel window and linear averaging parallel to the VLM operation 1 2 General features of SVAN 956 e Advanced Data Logger including spectra s logging on the USB Memory Stick providing almost unlimited logging capacity e Time domain signal recording option e Advanced trigger and alarm functions e USB 1 1 Host amp Client interface real time PC front end application supported SVAN 956 USER MANUAL e RS 232 and IrDA interfaces options e Built in signal generator option e Integration time programmable up to 24 h e Power supply by four AA rechargeable or standard batteries e Hand held light weight and robust case e Easy in use 1 3 Accessories included GRA
310. w SPECTRUM 6 4 6 1 2 Switching on off three profiles view 3 PROFILES 6 4 6 1 3 Setting on off logger view LOGGER 6 6 6 1 4 Setting on off the view of the file description FILE INFO 6 7 6 2 Setting the parameters of the graphical modes DISPLAY SETUP 6 7 6 2 1 Setting the scale of the presentation and the display s grid DISPLAY SCALE 6 8 6 2 2 Selection of the Spectrum Type in VM SPECTRUM TYPE 6 10 6 2 3 Setting the parameters of the logger files presentation SPECTRUM VIEW 6 11 6 2 4 Selection of the Weighting Filters TOTAL VALUES 6 12 6 2 5 Setting the parameters of the logger files presentation LOGGER VIEW 6 14 6 3 Selection of the logger s file to the display presentation LOGGER VIEW 6 15 6 4 Setting the parameters of the display SCREEN SETUP 6 17 6 4 1 Setting the contrast of the display CONTRAST 6 17 6 4 2 Automatic switch off of the backlight BACKLIGHT TIMEOUT 6 18 6 5 Checking the state of the internal battery BATTERY 6 18 6 6 Checking specification of the instrument UNIT LABEL 6 19 7 SAVING THE MEASUREMENT RESULTS FILE 7 1 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL 7 1 Saving files in the instrument s memory SAVE and SAVE NEXT 7 3 7 2 Controlling the data storing in the instrument s memory SAVE OPTIONS 7 7 7 2 1 Saving data starting from the same address RAM FILE 7 7 7 2 2 Replacement of the existing files by the new ones REPLACE 7 7 7 2 3 Controlling the measurement results savings AUTO SAVE 7 8 7 2 4 Direct acce
311. z LINES Control diagram of the INPUT list in the ENVELOPING mode 3 7 SVAN 956 USER MANUAL HERSUR SETUP SH lt Delete 5 gt n INPUT HERSUBENENT SETUP RMS HP 10 mm s iN TG8n s Si6mm s 1 00km s n INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE FILE 1 TRIGGER SETUP n INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP PROFILE 3 TRIGGER SETUP n INPUT MEASUREMENT SETUP MEASUREMENT RANGE a a n IHPUT TRIGGER SETUP HERSURE TRIGGER MERSUREMEHT SETUP MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER MEASUREMENT RANGE Rasa arta as RECORDER TRIGGER IRIGGER SETUP LOGGER TRIGGER RECORDER TRIGGER Kz TRIGGER SETUP MEASURE TRIGGER TRIGGER LOGGER TRIERER RECORDER TRIGGER RI LEVEL 118 0 mise LEVEL RMSCL Control diagram of the INPUT list in the LEVEL METER mode SVAN 956 USER MANUAL DISPLAY one of the main lists available after pressing the MENU push button DISPLAY MODES sub list it enables the user to activate V or switch off the available modes of result s presentation SPECTRUM available values V or this position is active only for 1 1 OCTAVE 1 3 OCTAVE and FFT mode 3 PROFILES available values N or LOGGER available values V or 1 FILE INFO available values N or DISPLAY SETUP sub list DISPLAY SCALE SCALE available values LIN LOG e X ZOOMi it informs

956 DRAFT VERSION all

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents